Annotation of embedaddon/readline/doc/texinfo.tex, revision 1.1.1.1

1.1       misho       1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
                      2: % 
                      3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
                      4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
                      5: %
                      6: \def\texinfoversion{2013-09-11.11}
                      7: %
                      8: % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
                      9: % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
                     10: % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
                     11: %
                     12: % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
                     13: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
                     14: % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
                     15: % License, or (at your option) any later version.
                     16: %
                     17: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
                     18: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
                     19: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
                     20: % General Public License for more details.
                     21: %
                     22: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
                     23: % along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
                     24: %
                     25: % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
                     26: % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
                     27: % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
                     28: % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
                     29: %
                     30: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
                     31: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
                     32: %   http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
                     33: %   http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
                     34: %   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
                     35: % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
                     36: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
                     37: %
                     38: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
                     39: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
                     40: % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
                     41: %
                     42: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
                     43: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
                     44: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
                     45: %   tex foo.texi
                     46: %   texindex foo.??
                     47: %   tex foo.texi
                     48: %   tex foo.texi
                     49: %   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
                     50: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
                     51: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
                     52: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
                     53: %
                     54: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
                     55: % extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
                     56: % full Texinfo distribution.
                     57: %
                     58: % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
                     59: 
                     60: 
                     61: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
                     62: 
                     63: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
                     64: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
                     65: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
                     66: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
                     67:   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
                     68: 
                     69: \chardef\other=12
                     70: 
                     71: % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
                     72: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
                     73: \let\+ = \relax
                     74: 
                     75: % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
                     76: \let\ptexb=\b
                     77: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
                     78: \let\ptexc=\c
                     79: \let\ptexcomma=\,
                     80: \let\ptexdot=\.
                     81: \let\ptexdots=\dots
                     82: \let\ptexend=\end
                     83: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
                     84: \let\ptexexclam=\!
                     85: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
                     86: \let\ptexgtr=>
                     87: \let\ptexhat=^
                     88: \let\ptexi=\i
                     89: \let\ptexindent=\indent
                     90: \let\ptexinsert=\insert
                     91: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
                     92: \let\ptexless=<
                     93: \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
                     94: \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
                     95: \let\ptexplus=+
                     96: \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
                     97: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
                     98: \let\ptexslash=\/
                     99: \let\ptexstar=\*
                    100: \let\ptext=\t
                    101: \let\ptextop=\top
                    102: {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
                    103: 
                    104: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
                    105: % starts a new line in the output.
                    106: \newlinechar = `^^J
                    107: 
                    108: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
                    109: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
                    110: %
                    111: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
                    112:   \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
                    113: \else
                    114:   \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
                    115: \fi
                    116: 
                    117: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
                    118: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
                    119: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
                    120: \ifx\putworderror\undefined     \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
                    121: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
                    122: \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
                    123: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined       \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
                    124: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined   \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
                    125: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
                    126: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
                    127: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
                    128: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
                    129: \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
                    130: \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
                    131: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
                    132: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
                    133: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
                    134: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
                    135: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
                    136: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
                    137: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
                    138: %
                    139: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
                    140: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
                    141: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
                    142: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
                    143: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
                    144: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
                    145: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
                    146: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
                    147: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
                    148: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
                    149: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
                    150: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
                    151: %
                    152: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
                    153: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
                    154: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
                    155: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
                    156: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
                    157: 
                    158: % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
                    159: \chardef\spacecat = 10
                    160: \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
                    161: 
                    162: % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
                    163: \chardef\ampChar   = `\&
                    164: \chardef\colonChar = `\:
                    165: \chardef\commaChar = `\,
                    166: \chardef\dashChar  = `\-
                    167: \chardef\dotChar   = `\.
                    168: \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
                    169: \chardef\hashChar  = `\#
                    170: \chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
                    171: \chardef\questChar = `\?
                    172: \chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
                    173: \chardef\semiChar  = `\;
                    174: \chardef\slashChar = `\/
                    175: \chardef\underChar = `\_
                    176: 
                    177: % Ignore a token.
                    178: %
                    179: \def\gobble#1{}
                    180: 
                    181: % The following is used inside several \edef's.
                    182: \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
                    183: 
                    184: % Hyphenation fixes.
                    185: \hyphenation{
                    186:   Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
                    187:   ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
                    188:   data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
                    189:   man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
                    190:   par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
                    191:   spell-ing spell-ings
                    192:   stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
                    193:   wide-spread wrap-around
                    194: }
                    195: 
                    196: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
                    197: \newdimen\bindingoffset
                    198: \newdimen\normaloffset
                    199: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
                    200: 
                    201: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
                    202: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
                    203: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
                    204: %
                    205: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
                    206: 
                    207: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
                    208: % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
                    209: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
                    210: % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
                    211: % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
                    212: %
                    213: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
                    214: \def\loggingall{%
                    215:   \tracingstats2
                    216:   \tracingpages1
                    217:   \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
                    218:   \tracingparagraphs1
                    219:   \tracingoutput1
                    220:   \tracingmacros2
                    221:   \tracingrestores1
                    222:   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
                    223:   \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
                    224:     \tracingscantokens1
                    225:     \tracingifs1
                    226:     \tracinggroups1
                    227:     \tracingnesting2
                    228:     \tracingassigns1
                    229:   \fi
                    230:   \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
                    231:   \errorcontextlines16
                    232: }%
                    233: 
                    234: % @errormsg{MSG}.  Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
                    235: % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
                    236: % after all.
                    237: % 
                    238: \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
                    239: \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
                    240: 
                    241: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
                    242: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
                    243: %
                    244: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
                    245:   \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
                    246: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
                    247:   \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
                    248: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
                    249:   \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
                    250: 
                    251: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
                    252: %
                    253: \newif\ifcropmarks
                    254: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
                    255: %
                    256: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
                    257: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
                    258: %
                    259: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
                    260: \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
                    261: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
                    262: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
                    263: 
                    264: % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
                    265: % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
                    266: % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
                    267: %
                    268: % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
                    269: % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
                    270: %
                    271: % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
                    272: % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
                    273: % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.  The solution is
                    274: % described on page 260 of The TeXbook.  It involves outputting two
                    275: % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
                    276: % one after.  I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
                    277: \def\domark{%
                    278:   \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
                    279:   \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
                    280:   \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
                    281:   \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
                    282:   \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
                    283:   \mark{%
                    284:                    \the\toks0 \the\toks2  % 0: top marks (\last...)
                    285:       \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6  % 1: bottom marks (default, \prev...)
                    286:     \noexpand\else \the\toks8             % 2: color marks
                    287:   }%
                    288: }
                    289: % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
                    290: % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
                    291: % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
                    292: % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
                    293: % first @chapter.
                    294: \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
                    295:   \ifcase0\topmark\fi
                    296:   \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
                    297: }
                    298: \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
                    299: \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
                    300: 
                    301: % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
                    302: \def\lastchapterdefs{}
                    303: \def\lastsectiondefs{}
                    304: \def\prevchapterdefs{}
                    305: \def\prevsectiondefs{}
                    306: \def\lastcolordefs{}
                    307: 
                    308: % Main output routine.
                    309: \chardef\PAGE = 255
                    310: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
                    311: 
                    312: \newbox\headlinebox
                    313: \newbox\footlinebox
                    314: 
                    315: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
                    316: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
                    317: \def\onepageout#1{%
                    318:   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
                    319:   %
                    320:   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
                    321:   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
                    322:   %
                    323:   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
                    324:   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
                    325:   \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \texinfochars}
                    326:   %
                    327:   \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
                    328:   \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
                    329:   %
                    330:   \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
                    331:   \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}%
                    332:   %
                    333:   {%
                    334:     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
                    335:     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
                    336:     % before the \shipout runs.
                    337:     %
                    338:     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
                    339:     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
                    340:                % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
                    341:                % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
                    342:                % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
                    343:                % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
                    344:                % it needs to be
                    345:                % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
                    346:     \shipout\vbox{%
                    347:       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
                    348:       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
                    349:       %
                    350:       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
                    351:         \hsize = \outerhsize
                    352:         \vskip-\topandbottommargin
                    353:         \vtop to0pt{%
                    354:           \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
                    355:           \nointerlineskip
                    356:           \line{%
                    357:             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
                    358:             \hfill
                    359:             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
                    360:           }%
                    361:           \vss}%
                    362:         \vskip\topandbottommargin
                    363:         \line\bgroup
                    364:           \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
                    365:           \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
                    366:           \vbox\bgroup
                    367:       \fi
                    368:       %
                    369:       \unvbox\headlinebox
                    370:       \pagebody{#1}%
                    371:       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
                    372:         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
                    373:         % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
                    374:         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
                    375:         \vskip 24pt
                    376:         \unvbox\footlinebox
                    377:       \fi
                    378:       %
                    379:       \ifcropmarks
                    380:           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
                    381:         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
                    382:         \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
                    383:         \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
                    384:         \vbox to0pt{\vss
                    385:           \line{%
                    386:             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
                    387:             \hfill
                    388:             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
                    389:           }%
                    390:           \nointerlineskip
                    391:           \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
                    392:         }%
                    393:       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
                    394:       \fi
                    395:     }% end of \shipout\vbox
                    396:   }% end of group with \indexdummies
                    397:   \advancepageno
                    398:   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
                    399: }
                    400: 
                    401: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
                    402: 
                    403: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
                    404: {\catcode`\@ =11
                    405: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
                    406: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
                    407: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
                    408:   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
                    409: \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
                    410: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
                    411: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
                    412: }
                    413: 
                    414: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
                    415: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
                    416: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
                    417: %
                    418: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
                    419: \def\nstop{\vbox
                    420:   {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
                    421: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
                    422: \def\nsbot{\vbox
                    423:   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
                    424: 
                    425: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
                    426: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
                    427: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
                    428: %
                    429: \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
                    430: \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
                    431:   \def\argtorun{#2}%
                    432:   \begingroup
                    433:     \obeylines
                    434:     \spaceisspace
                    435:     #1%
                    436:     \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
                    437: }
                    438: 
                    439: {\obeylines %
                    440:   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
                    441:     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
                    442:     \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
                    443:   }%
                    444: }
                    445: 
                    446: % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
                    447: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
                    448: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
                    449: 
                    450: % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
                    451: %
                    452: % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
                    453: %    @end itemize  @c foo
                    454: % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
                    455: % by \finishparsearg.
                    456: %
                    457: \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
                    458: \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
                    459: \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
                    460:   \def\temp{#3}%
                    461:   \ifx\temp\empty
                    462:     % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
                    463:     \let\temp\finishparsearg
                    464:   \else
                    465:     \let\temp\argcheckspaces
                    466:   \fi
                    467:   % Put the space token in:
                    468:   \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
                    469: }
                    470: 
                    471: % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
                    472: % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
                    473: % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
                    474: % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
                    475: % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
                    476: % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
                    477: % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
                    478: %
                    479: % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
                    480: %
                    481: \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
                    482: 
                    483: % \parseargdef\foo{...}
                    484: %      is roughly equivalent to
                    485: % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
                    486: % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
                    487: %
                    488: % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
                    489: % favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
                    490: 
                    491: \def\parseargdef#1{%
                    492:   \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
                    493: }
                    494: \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
                    495:   \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
                    496:   \def#1##1%
                    497: }
                    498: 
                    499: % Several utility definitions with active space:
                    500: {
                    501:   \obeyspaces
                    502:   \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
                    503: 
                    504:   % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
                    505:   % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
                    506:   % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
                    507:   % should produce a line of output anyway.
                    508:   %
                    509:   \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
                    510: 
                    511:   % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
                    512:   % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
                    513:   % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
                    514:   \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
                    515: }
                    516: 
                    517: 
                    518: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
                    519: 
                    520: % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
                    521: %
                    522: %   \envdef\foo{...}
                    523: %   \def\Efoo{...}
                    524: %
                    525: % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
                    526: % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
                    527: % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
                    528: % whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
                    529: % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
                    530: %
                    531: % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
                    532: % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group.  (The
                    533: % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
                    534: % special case.)
                    535: 
                    536: 
                    537: % At run-time, environments start with this:
                    538: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
                    539: % initialize
                    540: \let\thisenv\empty
                    541: 
                    542: % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
                    543: \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
                    544: \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
                    545: 
                    546: % Check whether we're in the right environment:
                    547: \def\checkenv#1{%
                    548:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    549:   \ifx\thisenv\temp
                    550:   \else
                    551:     \badenverr
                    552:   \fi
                    553: }
                    554: 
                    555: % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
                    556: \def\badenverr{%
                    557:   \errhelp = \EMsimple
                    558:   \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
                    559:     not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
                    560: }
                    561: \def\inenvironment#1{%
                    562:   \ifx#1\empty
                    563:     outside of any environment%
                    564:   \else
                    565:     in environment \expandafter\string#1%
                    566:   \fi
                    567: }
                    568: 
                    569: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
                    570: % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
                    571: %
                    572: \parseargdef\end{%
                    573:   \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
                    574:   \else
                    575:     % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
                    576:     \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
                    577:     \csname E#1\endcsname
                    578:     \endgroup
                    579:   \fi
                    580: }
                    581: 
                    582: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
                    583: 
                    584: 
                    585: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
                    586: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
                    587: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
                    588: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
                    589: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
                    590: {\catcode`@ = 11
                    591:  % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
                    592:  % if the definition is written into an index file.
                    593:  \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
                    594:  \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
                    595: }
                    596: 
                    597: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
                    598: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
                    599: 
                    600: % @* forces a line break.
                    601: \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
                    602: 
                    603: % @/ allows a line break.
                    604: \let\/=\allowbreak
                    605: 
                    606: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
                    607: \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
                    608: 
                    609: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
                    610: \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
                    611: 
                    612: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
                    613: \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
                    614: 
                    615: % @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
                    616: %
                    617: \def\onword{on}
                    618: \def\offword{off}
                    619: %
                    620: \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
                    621:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    622:   \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
                    623:   \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
                    624:   \else
                    625:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                    626:     \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
                    627:   \fi\fi
                    628: }
                    629: 
                    630: % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
                    631: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
                    632: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
                    633: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
                    634: 
                    635: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
                    636: % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
                    637: % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
                    638: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
                    639: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
                    640: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
                    641: % the text is small, which looks bad.
                    642: %
                    643: % Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
                    644: % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
                    645: % does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
                    646: % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
                    647: % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
                    648: % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
                    649: %
                    650: \newbox\groupbox
                    651: \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
                    652: %
                    653: \envdef\group{%
                    654:   \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
                    655:     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
                    656:     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
                    657:   \fi
                    658:   \startsavinginserts
                    659:   %
                    660:   \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
                    661:     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
                    662:     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
                    663:     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
                    664:     % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
                    665:     % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
                    666:     % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
                    667:     \comment
                    668: }
                    669: %
                    670: % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
                    671: % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
                    672: % \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
                    673: % above.  But it's pretty close.
                    674: \def\Egroup{%
                    675:     % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
                    676:     % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
                    677:     \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
                    678:     \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
                    679:   \egroup           % End the \vtop.
                    680:   % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
                    681:   \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
                    682:   % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
                    683:   \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
                    684:   % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
                    685:   % group, force a page break.
                    686:   \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
                    687:     \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
                    688:       \page
                    689:     \fi
                    690:   \fi
                    691:   \box\groupbox
                    692:   \prevdepth = \dimen1
                    693:   \checkinserts
                    694: }
                    695: %
                    696: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
                    697: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
                    698: %
                    699: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
                    700: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
                    701: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
                    702: 
                    703: % @need space-in-mils
                    704: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
                    705: 
                    706: \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
                    707: 
                    708: \parseargdef\need{%
                    709:   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
                    710:   % paragraph.
                    711:   \par
                    712:   %
                    713:   % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
                    714:   \dimen0 = #1\mil
                    715:   \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
                    716:   \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
                    717:   \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
                    718:     %
                    719:     % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
                    720:     % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
                    721:     % And a page break here is fine.
                    722:     \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
                    723:     %
                    724:     % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
                    725:     % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
                    726:     % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
                    727:     % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
                    728:     % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
                    729:     %
                    730:     % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
                    731:     % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
                    732:     % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
                    733:     % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
                    734:     % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
                    735:     % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
                    736:     % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
                    737:     \penalty9999
                    738:     %
                    739:     % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
                    740:     \kern -#1\mil
                    741:     %
                    742:     % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
                    743:     \nobreak
                    744:   \fi
                    745: }
                    746: 
                    747: % @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
                    748: 
                    749: \let\br = \par
                    750: 
                    751: % @page forces the start of a new page.
                    752: %
                    753: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
                    754: 
                    755: % @exdent text....
                    756: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
                    757: 
                    758: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
                    759: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
                    760: \newskip\exdentamount
                    761: 
                    762: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
                    763: \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
                    764: 
                    765: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
                    766: \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
                    767:   \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
                    768: 
                    769: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
                    770: % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
                    771: % class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.  Not documented, written for gawk manual.
                    772: %
                    773: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
                    774: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
                    775: %
                    776: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
                    777:   \nobreak
                    778:   \kern-\strutdepth
                    779:   \vtop to \strutdepth{%
                    780:     \baselineskip=\strutdepth
                    781:     \vss
                    782:     % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
                    783:     % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
                    784:     \ifx#1l%
                    785:       \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
                    786:     \else
                    787:       \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
                    788:     \fi
                    789:     \null
                    790:   }%
                    791: }}
                    792: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
                    793: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
                    794: %
                    795: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
                    796: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
                    797: % else use TEXT for both).
                    798: %
                    799: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
                    800: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
                    801:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
                    802:   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
                    803:     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
                    804:     \def\righttext{#2}%
                    805:   \else
                    806:     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
                    807:     \def\righttext{#1}%
                    808:   \fi
                    809:   %
                    810:   \ifodd\pageno
                    811:     \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
                    812:   \else
                    813:     \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
                    814:   \fi
                    815:   \temp
                    816: }
                    817: 
                    818: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
                    819: % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
                    820: % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
                    821: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
                    822: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).  This command
                    823: % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
                    824: %
                    825: \def\|{%
                    826:   % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
                    827:   \leavevmode
                    828:   %
                    829:   % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
                    830:   \vadjust{%
                    831:     % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
                    832:     % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
                    833:     \vskip-\baselineskip
                    834:     %
                    835:     % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
                    836:     % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
                    837:     \llap{%
                    838:       %
                    839:       % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
                    840:       \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
                    841:       %
                    842:       % This is the space between the bar and the text.
                    843:       \hskip 12pt
                    844:     }%
                    845:   }%
                    846: }
                    847: 
                    848: % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
                    849: %
                    850: \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
                    851: \def\includezzz#1{%
                    852:   \pushthisfilestack
                    853:   \def\thisfile{#1}%
                    854:   {%
                    855:     \makevalueexpandable  % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
                    856:     \turnoffactive        % and allow special characters in the expansion
                    857:     \indexnofonts         % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
                    858:     \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
                    859:     \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
                    860:     %
                    861:     % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
                    862:     % definitions, etc.
                    863:     \expandafter
                    864:   }\temp
                    865:   \popthisfilestack
                    866: }
                    867: \def\filenamecatcodes{%
                    868:   \catcode`\\=\other
                    869:   \catcode`~=\other
                    870:   \catcode`^=\other
                    871:   \catcode`_=\other
                    872:   \catcode`|=\other
                    873:   \catcode`<=\other
                    874:   \catcode`>=\other
                    875:   \catcode`+=\other
                    876:   \catcode`-=\other
                    877:   \catcode`\`=\other
                    878:   \catcode`\'=\other
                    879: }
                    880: 
                    881: \def\pushthisfilestack{%
                    882:   \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
                    883: }
                    884: \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
                    885:   \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
                    886: }
                    887: \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
                    888:   \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
                    889: }
                    890: 
                    891: \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
                    892: \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
                    893:   the stack of filenames is empty.}}
                    894: %
                    895: \def\thisfile{}
                    896: 
                    897: % @center line
                    898: % outputs that line, centered.
                    899: %
                    900: \parseargdef\center{%
                    901:   \ifhmode
                    902:     \let\centersub\centerH
                    903:   \else
                    904:     \let\centersub\centerV
                    905:   \fi
                    906:   \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
                    907:   \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
                    908: }
                    909: \def\centerH#1{{%
                    910:   \hfil\break
                    911:   \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
                    912:   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
                    913:   \line{#1}%
                    914:   \break
                    915: }}
                    916: %
                    917: \newcount\centerpenalty
                    918: \def\centerV#1{%
                    919:   % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
                    920:   % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
                    921:   % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
                    922:   % prevent a page break here.
                    923:   \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
                    924:   \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
                    925:   \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
                    926:   \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
                    927: }
                    928: 
                    929: % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
                    930: %
                    931: \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
                    932: 
                    933: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
                    934: % @c is the same as @comment
                    935: % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
                    936: %
                    937: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
                    938: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
                    939: \commentxxx}
                    940: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
                    941: %
                    942: \let\c=\comment
                    943: 
                    944: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
                    945: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
                    946: % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
                    947: % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
                    948: %
                    949: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
                    950: \def\noneword{none}
                    951: %
                    952: \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
                    953:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    954:   \ifx\temp\asisword
                    955:   \else
                    956:     \ifx\temp\noneword
                    957:       \defaultparindent = 0pt
                    958:     \else
                    959:       \defaultparindent = #1em
                    960:     \fi
                    961:   \fi
                    962:   \parindent = \defaultparindent
                    963: }
                    964: 
                    965: % @exampleindent NCHARS
                    966: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
                    967: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
                    968: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
                    969: \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
                    970:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    971:   \ifx\temp\asisword
                    972:   \else
                    973:     \ifx\temp\noneword
                    974:       \lispnarrowing = 0pt
                    975:     \else
                    976:       \lispnarrowing = #1em
                    977:     \fi
                    978:   \fi
                    979: }
                    980: 
                    981: % @firstparagraphindent WORD
                    982: % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
                    983: % after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
                    984: % paragraphs.
                    985: %
                    986: % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
                    987: % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
                    988: % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
                    989: % By default, we suppress indentation.
                    990: %
                    991: \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
                    992: \def\insertword{insert}
                    993: %
                    994: \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
                    995:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    996:   \ifx\temp\noneword
                    997:     \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
                    998:   \else\ifx\temp\insertword
                    999:     \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
                   1000:   \else
                   1001:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   1002:     \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
                   1003:   \fi\fi
                   1004: }
                   1005: 
                   1006: % Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
                   1007: % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
                   1008: %
                   1009: % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
                   1010: % paragraph.
                   1011: %
                   1012: \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
                   1013:   \gdef\indent{%
                   1014:     \restorefirstparagraphindent
                   1015:     \indent
                   1016:   }%
                   1017:   \gdef\noindent{%
                   1018:     \restorefirstparagraphindent
                   1019:     \noindent
                   1020:   }%
                   1021:   \global\everypar = {%
                   1022:     \kern -\parindent
                   1023:     \restorefirstparagraphindent
                   1024:   }%
                   1025: }
                   1026: 
                   1027: \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
                   1028:   \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
                   1029:   \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
                   1030:   \global \everypar = {}%
                   1031: }
                   1032: 
                   1033: 
                   1034: % @refill is a no-op.
                   1035: \let\refill=\relax
                   1036: 
                   1037: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
                   1038: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
                   1039: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
                   1040: %
                   1041: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
                   1042: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
                   1043: 
                   1044: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
                   1045: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
                   1046: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
                   1047: \def\setfilename{%
                   1048:    \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
                   1049:    \iflinks
                   1050:      \tryauxfile
                   1051:      % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
                   1052:      \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
                   1053:    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
                   1054:    \openindices
                   1055:    \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
                   1056:    %
                   1057:    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
                   1058:    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
                   1059:    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
                   1060:    \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
                   1061:    \closein 1
                   1062:    %
                   1063:    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
                   1064: }
                   1065: 
                   1066: % Called from \setfilename.
                   1067: %
                   1068: \def\openindices{%
                   1069:   \newindex{cp}%
                   1070:   \newcodeindex{fn}%
                   1071:   \newcodeindex{vr}%
                   1072:   \newcodeindex{tp}%
                   1073:   \newcodeindex{ky}%
                   1074:   \newcodeindex{pg}%
                   1075: }
                   1076: 
                   1077: % @bye.
                   1078: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
                   1079: 
                   1080: 
                   1081: \message{pdf,}
                   1082: % adobe `portable' document format
                   1083: \newcount\tempnum
                   1084: \newcount\lnkcount
                   1085: \newtoks\filename
                   1086: \newcount\filenamelength
                   1087: \newcount\pgn
                   1088: \newtoks\toksA
                   1089: \newtoks\toksB
                   1090: \newtoks\toksC
                   1091: \newtoks\toksD
                   1092: \newbox\boxA
                   1093: \newcount\countA
                   1094: \newif\ifpdf
                   1095: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
                   1096: 
                   1097: % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
                   1098: % can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
                   1099: \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
                   1100: \else
                   1101:   \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
                   1102:   \else
                   1103:     \ifcase\pdfoutput
                   1104:     \else
                   1105:       \pdftrue
                   1106:     \fi
                   1107:   \fi
                   1108: \fi
                   1109: 
                   1110: % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
                   1111: % for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
                   1112: % double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
                   1113: % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
                   1114: % 
                   1115: % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
                   1116: % related messages.  The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
                   1117: % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
                   1118: % that's what we do.  pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
                   1119: % do this reliably, so we use it.
                   1120: 
                   1121: % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
                   1122: % which we \xdef.
                   1123: \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
                   1124:   \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
                   1125:     % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
                   1126:     % Many times it won't matter.
                   1127:   \else
                   1128:     % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
                   1129:     % backslashes, and other special chars.
                   1130:     \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
                   1131:   \fi
                   1132: }
                   1133: 
                   1134: \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
                   1135: with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
                   1136: be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
                   1137: output) for that.)}
                   1138: 
                   1139: \ifpdf
                   1140:   %
                   1141:   % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
                   1142:   % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
                   1143:   % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
                   1144:   % of actual black.
                   1145:   \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
                   1146:   \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
                   1147:   %
                   1148:   % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
                   1149:   % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
                   1150:   \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg  #1 RG}}
                   1151:   %
                   1152:   % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
                   1153:   % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
                   1154:   \def\setcolor#1{%
                   1155:     \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
                   1156:     \domark
                   1157:     \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
                   1158:   }
                   1159:   %
                   1160:   \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
                   1161:   \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
                   1162:   \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
                   1163:   \def\lastcolordefs{}
                   1164:   %
                   1165:   \def\makefootline{%
                   1166:     \baselineskip24pt
                   1167:     \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
                   1168:   }
                   1169:   %
                   1170:   \def\makeheadline{%
                   1171:     \vbox to 0pt{%
                   1172:       \vskip-22.5pt
                   1173:       \line{%
                   1174:         \vbox to8.5pt{}%
                   1175:         % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
                   1176:         \getcolormarks
                   1177:         % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
                   1178:         \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
                   1179:       }%
                   1180:       \vss
                   1181:     }%
                   1182:     \nointerlineskip
                   1183:   }
                   1184:   %
                   1185:   %
                   1186:   \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
                   1187:   %
                   1188:   % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
                   1189:   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
                   1190:     \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
                   1191:     \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
                   1192:     %
                   1193:     % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
                   1194:     % others).  Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
                   1195:     % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
                   1196:     % bitmap.
                   1197:     \let\pdfimgext=\empty
                   1198:     \begingroup
                   1199:       \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
                   1200:         \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
                   1201:           \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
                   1202:             \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
                   1203:               \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
                   1204:                 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
                   1205:                   \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
                   1206:                   \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
                   1207:                 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
                   1208:                 \fi
                   1209:               \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
                   1210:               \fi
                   1211:             \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
                   1212:             \fi
                   1213:           \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
                   1214:           \fi
                   1215:         \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
                   1216:         \fi
                   1217:       \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
                   1218:       \fi
                   1219:       \closein 1
                   1220:     \endgroup
                   1221:     %
                   1222:     % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
                   1223:     % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
                   1224:     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
                   1225:       \immediate\pdfimage
                   1226:     \else
                   1227:       \immediate\pdfximage
                   1228:     \fi
                   1229:       \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
                   1230:       \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
                   1231:       \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
                   1232:          #1.\pdfimgext
                   1233:        \else
                   1234:          {#1.\pdfimgext}%
                   1235:        \fi
                   1236:     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
                   1237:       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
                   1238:     \fi}
                   1239:   %
                   1240:   \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
                   1241:     % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
                   1242:     % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
                   1243:     \indexnofonts
                   1244:     \turnoffactive
                   1245:     \makevalueexpandable
                   1246:     \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
                   1247:     \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
                   1248:     \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
                   1249:   }}
                   1250:   %
                   1251:   % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
                   1252:   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
                   1253:   %
                   1254:   % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
                   1255:   % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
                   1256:   \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
                   1257:   \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
                   1258:   \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
                   1259:   %
                   1260:   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
                   1261:   % come from Petr Olsak
                   1262:   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
                   1263:     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
                   1264:   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
                   1265:     \advance\tempnum by 1
                   1266:     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
                   1267:   %
                   1268:   % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
                   1269:   % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
                   1270:   % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
                   1271:   % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
                   1272:   % #4 is the page number
                   1273:   %
                   1274:   \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
                   1275:     % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
                   1276:     % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
                   1277:     % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
                   1278:     % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
                   1279:     \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
                   1280:     \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
                   1281:       \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
                   1282:     \else
                   1283:       \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
                   1284:     \fi
                   1285:     %
                   1286:     % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
                   1287:     \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
                   1288:     \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
                   1289:     %
                   1290:     \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
                   1291:   }
                   1292:   %
                   1293:   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
                   1294:     \begingroup
                   1295:       % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
                   1296:       \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
                   1297:       \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
                   1298:        \def\thischapnum{##2}%
                   1299:        \def\thissecnum{0}%
                   1300:        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
                   1301:       }%
                   1302:       \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
                   1303:        \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
                   1304:        \def\thissecnum{##2}%
                   1305:        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
                   1306:       }%
                   1307:       \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
                   1308:        \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
                   1309:        \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
                   1310:       }%
                   1311:       \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
                   1312:        \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
                   1313:       }%
                   1314:       \def\thischapnum{0}%
                   1315:       \def\thissecnum{0}%
                   1316:       \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
                   1317:       %
                   1318:       % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
                   1319:       % al. a second time, below.
                   1320:       \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
                   1321:       \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
                   1322:       \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
                   1323:       \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
                   1324:       \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
                   1325:       \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
                   1326:       \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
                   1327:       \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
                   1328:       \readdatafile{toc}%
                   1329:       %
                   1330:       % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
                   1331:       % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
                   1332:       % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
                   1333:       %
                   1334:       % We use the node names as the destinations.
                   1335:       \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
                   1336:         \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
                   1337:       \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
                   1338:         \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
                   1339:       \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
                   1340:         \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
                   1341:       \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
                   1342:         \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
                   1343:       %
                   1344:       % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
                   1345:       % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
                   1346:       % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
                   1347:       % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
                   1348:       % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
                   1349:       %
                   1350:       % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
                   1351:       % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Too
                   1352:       % much work for too little return.  Just use the ASCII equivalents
                   1353:       % we use for the index sort strings.
                   1354:       % 
                   1355:       \indexnofonts
                   1356:       \setupdatafile
                   1357:       % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
                   1358:       % Texinfo index files.  So set that up.
                   1359:       \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
                   1360:       \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
                   1361:       \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
                   1362:       \input \tocreadfilename
                   1363:     \endgroup
                   1364:   }
                   1365:   {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
                   1366:    \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
                   1367:    \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
                   1368:    \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
                   1369:   ]
                   1370:   %
                   1371:   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
                   1372:     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
                   1373:     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
                   1374:       \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
                   1375:       \advance\filenamelength by 1
                   1376:     \fi
                   1377:     \nextsp}
                   1378:   \def\getfilename#1{%
                   1379:     \filenamelength=0
                   1380:     % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
                   1381:     % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
                   1382:     \edef\temp{#1}%
                   1383:     \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
                   1384:   }
                   1385:   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
                   1386:     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
                   1387:   \else
                   1388:     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
                   1389:   \fi
                   1390:   % make a live url in pdf output.
                   1391:   \def\pdfurl#1{%
                   1392:     \begingroup
                   1393:       % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
                   1394:       % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
                   1395:       % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
                   1396:       % people have actually reported a problem with.
                   1397:       %
                   1398:       \normalturnoffactive
                   1399:       \def\@{@}%
                   1400:       \let\/=\empty
                   1401:       \makevalueexpandable
                   1402:       % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
                   1403:       % special-casing \var here?
                   1404:       \def\var##1{##1}%
                   1405:       %
                   1406:       \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
                   1407:       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
                   1408:         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
                   1409:     \endgroup}
                   1410:   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
                   1411:   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
                   1412:   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
                   1413:   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
                   1414:   \def\maketoks{%
                   1415:     \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
                   1416:     \ifx\first0\adn0
                   1417:     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
                   1418:     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
                   1419:     \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
                   1420:     \else
                   1421:       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
                   1422:       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
                   1423:         \let\next=\maketoks
                   1424:         \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
                   1425:         \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
                   1426:       \fi
                   1427:     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
                   1428:     \next}
                   1429:   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
                   1430:     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
                   1431:   \def\pdflink#1{%
                   1432:     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
                   1433:     \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
                   1434:   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
                   1435: \else
                   1436:   % non-pdf mode
                   1437:   \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
                   1438:   \let\pdfurl = \gobble
                   1439:   \let\endlink = \relax
                   1440:   \let\setcolor = \gobble
                   1441:   \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
                   1442:   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
                   1443: \fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
                   1444: 
                   1445: 
                   1446: \message{fonts,}
                   1447: 
                   1448: % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
                   1449: % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
                   1450: % italics, not bold italics.
                   1451: %
                   1452: \def\setfontstyle#1{%
                   1453:   \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
                   1454:   \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
                   1455: }
                   1456: 
                   1457: % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
                   1458: %
                   1459: \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
                   1460: 
                   1461: \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
                   1462: \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
                   1463: \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
                   1464: \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
                   1465: \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
                   1466: 
                   1467: % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
                   1468: % in those cases "rm" is bold.  Sigh.
                   1469: \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
                   1470: 
                   1471: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
                   1472: % So we set up a \sf.
                   1473: \newfam\sffam
                   1474: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
                   1475: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
                   1476: 
                   1477: % We don't need math for this font style.
                   1478: \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
                   1479: 
                   1480: 
                   1481: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
                   1482: % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
                   1483: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
                   1484: %
                   1485: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
                   1486: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
                   1487: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
                   1488: %
                   1489: % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
                   1490: \def\baselinefactor{1}
                   1491: %
                   1492: \newdimen\textleading
                   1493: \def\setleading#1{%
                   1494:   \dimen0 = #1\relax
                   1495:   \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
                   1496:   \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
                   1497:   \normalbaselines
                   1498:   \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
                   1499:     \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
                   1500:                     depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
                   1501:   }%
                   1502: }
                   1503: 
                   1504: % PDF CMaps.  See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
                   1505: %
                   1506: % do nothing with this by default.
                   1507: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
                   1508: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
                   1509: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
                   1510: 
                   1511: % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
                   1512: % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
                   1513: % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
                   1514: \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
                   1515:   \begingroup
                   1516:     \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
                   1517:     \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
                   1518: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
                   1519: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
                   1520: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
                   1521: %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
                   1522: %%Version: 1.000
                   1523: %%EndComments
                   1524: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
                   1525: 12 dict begin
                   1526: begincmap
                   1527: /CIDSystemInfo
                   1528: << /Registry (TeX)
                   1529: /Ordering (OT1)
                   1530: /Supplement 0
                   1531: >> def
                   1532: /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
                   1533: /CMapType 2 def
                   1534: 1 begincodespacerange
                   1535: <00> <7F>
                   1536: endcodespacerange
                   1537: 8 beginbfrange
                   1538: <00> <01> <0393>
                   1539: <09> <0A> <03A8>
                   1540: <23> <26> <0023>
                   1541: <28> <3B> <0028>
                   1542: <3F> <5B> <003F>
                   1543: <5D> <5E> <005D>
                   1544: <61> <7A> <0061>
                   1545: <7B> <7C> <2013>
                   1546: endbfrange
                   1547: 40 beginbfchar
                   1548: <02> <0398>
                   1549: <03> <039B>
                   1550: <04> <039E>
                   1551: <05> <03A0>
                   1552: <06> <03A3>
                   1553: <07> <03D2>
                   1554: <08> <03A6>
                   1555: <0B> <00660066>
                   1556: <0C> <00660069>
                   1557: <0D> <0066006C>
                   1558: <0E> <006600660069>
                   1559: <0F> <00660066006C>
                   1560: <10> <0131>
                   1561: <11> <0237>
                   1562: <12> <0060>
                   1563: <13> <00B4>
                   1564: <14> <02C7>
                   1565: <15> <02D8>
                   1566: <16> <00AF>
                   1567: <17> <02DA>
                   1568: <18> <00B8>
                   1569: <19> <00DF>
                   1570: <1A> <00E6>
                   1571: <1B> <0153>
                   1572: <1C> <00F8>
                   1573: <1D> <00C6>
                   1574: <1E> <0152>
                   1575: <1F> <00D8>
                   1576: <21> <0021>
                   1577: <22> <201D>
                   1578: <27> <2019>
                   1579: <3C> <00A1>
                   1580: <3D> <003D>
                   1581: <3E> <00BF>
                   1582: <5C> <201C>
                   1583: <5F> <02D9>
                   1584: <60> <2018>
                   1585: <7D> <02DD>
                   1586: <7E> <007E>
                   1587: <7F> <00A8>
                   1588: endbfchar
                   1589: endcmap
                   1590: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
                   1591: end
                   1592: end
                   1593: %%EndResource
                   1594: %%EOF
                   1595:     }\endgroup
                   1596:   \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
                   1597:     \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
                   1598:   }%
                   1599: %
                   1600: % \cmapOT1IT
                   1601:   \begingroup
                   1602:     \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
                   1603:     \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
                   1604: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
                   1605: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
                   1606: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
                   1607: %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
                   1608: %%Version: 1.000
                   1609: %%EndComments
                   1610: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
                   1611: 12 dict begin
                   1612: begincmap
                   1613: /CIDSystemInfo
                   1614: << /Registry (TeX)
                   1615: /Ordering (OT1IT)
                   1616: /Supplement 0
                   1617: >> def
                   1618: /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
                   1619: /CMapType 2 def
                   1620: 1 begincodespacerange
                   1621: <00> <7F>
                   1622: endcodespacerange
                   1623: 8 beginbfrange
                   1624: <00> <01> <0393>
                   1625: <09> <0A> <03A8>
                   1626: <25> <26> <0025>
                   1627: <28> <3B> <0028>
                   1628: <3F> <5B> <003F>
                   1629: <5D> <5E> <005D>
                   1630: <61> <7A> <0061>
                   1631: <7B> <7C> <2013>
                   1632: endbfrange
                   1633: 42 beginbfchar
                   1634: <02> <0398>
                   1635: <03> <039B>
                   1636: <04> <039E>
                   1637: <05> <03A0>
                   1638: <06> <03A3>
                   1639: <07> <03D2>
                   1640: <08> <03A6>
                   1641: <0B> <00660066>
                   1642: <0C> <00660069>
                   1643: <0D> <0066006C>
                   1644: <0E> <006600660069>
                   1645: <0F> <00660066006C>
                   1646: <10> <0131>
                   1647: <11> <0237>
                   1648: <12> <0060>
                   1649: <13> <00B4>
                   1650: <14> <02C7>
                   1651: <15> <02D8>
                   1652: <16> <00AF>
                   1653: <17> <02DA>
                   1654: <18> <00B8>
                   1655: <19> <00DF>
                   1656: <1A> <00E6>
                   1657: <1B> <0153>
                   1658: <1C> <00F8>
                   1659: <1D> <00C6>
                   1660: <1E> <0152>
                   1661: <1F> <00D8>
                   1662: <21> <0021>
                   1663: <22> <201D>
                   1664: <23> <0023>
                   1665: <24> <00A3>
                   1666: <27> <2019>
                   1667: <3C> <00A1>
                   1668: <3D> <003D>
                   1669: <3E> <00BF>
                   1670: <5C> <201C>
                   1671: <5F> <02D9>
                   1672: <60> <2018>
                   1673: <7D> <02DD>
                   1674: <7E> <007E>
                   1675: <7F> <00A8>
                   1676: endbfchar
                   1677: endcmap
                   1678: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
                   1679: end
                   1680: end
                   1681: %%EndResource
                   1682: %%EOF
                   1683:     }\endgroup
                   1684:   \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
                   1685:     \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
                   1686:   }%
                   1687: %
                   1688: % \cmapOT1TT
                   1689:   \begingroup
                   1690:     \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
                   1691:     \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
                   1692: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
                   1693: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
                   1694: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
                   1695: %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
                   1696: %%Version: 1.000
                   1697: %%EndComments
                   1698: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
                   1699: 12 dict begin
                   1700: begincmap
                   1701: /CIDSystemInfo
                   1702: << /Registry (TeX)
                   1703: /Ordering (OT1TT)
                   1704: /Supplement 0
                   1705: >> def
                   1706: /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
                   1707: /CMapType 2 def
                   1708: 1 begincodespacerange
                   1709: <00> <7F>
                   1710: endcodespacerange
                   1711: 5 beginbfrange
                   1712: <00> <01> <0393>
                   1713: <09> <0A> <03A8>
                   1714: <21> <26> <0021>
                   1715: <28> <5F> <0028>
                   1716: <61> <7E> <0061>
                   1717: endbfrange
                   1718: 32 beginbfchar
                   1719: <02> <0398>
                   1720: <03> <039B>
                   1721: <04> <039E>
                   1722: <05> <03A0>
                   1723: <06> <03A3>
                   1724: <07> <03D2>
                   1725: <08> <03A6>
                   1726: <0B> <2191>
                   1727: <0C> <2193>
                   1728: <0D> <0027>
                   1729: <0E> <00A1>
                   1730: <0F> <00BF>
                   1731: <10> <0131>
                   1732: <11> <0237>
                   1733: <12> <0060>
                   1734: <13> <00B4>
                   1735: <14> <02C7>
                   1736: <15> <02D8>
                   1737: <16> <00AF>
                   1738: <17> <02DA>
                   1739: <18> <00B8>
                   1740: <19> <00DF>
                   1741: <1A> <00E6>
                   1742: <1B> <0153>
                   1743: <1C> <00F8>
                   1744: <1D> <00C6>
                   1745: <1E> <0152>
                   1746: <1F> <00D8>
                   1747: <20> <2423>
                   1748: <27> <2019>
                   1749: <60> <2018>
                   1750: <7F> <00A8>
                   1751: endbfchar
                   1752: endcmap
                   1753: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
                   1754: end
                   1755: end
                   1756: %%EndResource
                   1757: %%EOF
                   1758:     }\endgroup
                   1759:   \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
                   1760:     \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
                   1761:   }%
                   1762: \fi\fi
                   1763: 
                   1764: 
                   1765: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
                   1766: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
                   1767: % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
                   1768: % Example:
                   1769: % #1 = \textrm
                   1770: % #2 = \rmshape
                   1771: % #3 = 10
                   1772: % #4 = \mainmagstep
                   1773: % #5 = OT1
                   1774: %
                   1775: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
                   1776:   \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
                   1777:   \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
                   1778: }
                   1779: % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
                   1780: \let\cmap\gobble
                   1781: %
                   1782: % (end of cmaps)
                   1783: 
                   1784: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
                   1785: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
                   1786: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
                   1787: \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
                   1788: \def\fontprefix{cm}
                   1789: \fi
                   1790: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
                   1791: \def\rmshape{r}
                   1792: \def\rmbshape{bx}               % where the normal face is bold
                   1793: \def\bfshape{b}
                   1794: \def\bxshape{bx}
                   1795: \def\ttshape{tt}
                   1796: \def\ttbshape{tt}
                   1797: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
                   1798: \def\itshape{ti}
                   1799: \def\itbshape{bxti}
                   1800: \def\slshape{sl}
                   1801: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
                   1802: \def\sfshape{ss}
                   1803: \def\sfbshape{ss}
                   1804: \def\scshape{csc}
                   1805: \def\scbshape{csc}
                   1806: 
                   1807: % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  (The default in Texinfo.)
                   1808: %
                   1809: \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
                   1810: % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
                   1811: \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
                   1812: \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
                   1813: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1814: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
                   1815: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1816: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
                   1817: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1818: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1819: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1820: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
                   1821: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
                   1822: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
                   1823: \def\textecsize{1095}
                   1824: 
                   1825: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
                   1826: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   1827: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
                   1828: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
                   1829: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
                   1830: 
                   1831: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
                   1832: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
                   1833: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   1834: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   1835: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
                   1836: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
                   1837: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   1838: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   1839: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
                   1840: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
                   1841: \font\smalli=cmmi9
                   1842: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
                   1843: \def\smallecsize{0900}
                   1844: 
                   1845: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
                   1846: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
                   1847: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
                   1848: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   1849: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
                   1850: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
                   1851: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
                   1852: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
                   1853: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
                   1854: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
                   1855: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
                   1856: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
                   1857: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
                   1858: 
                   1859: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
                   1860: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
                   1861: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
                   1862: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
                   1863: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
                   1864: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
                   1865: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
                   1866: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   1867: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
                   1868: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
                   1869: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
                   1870: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
                   1871: \def\titleecsize{2074}
                   1872: 
                   1873: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
                   1874: \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
                   1875: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
                   1876: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
                   1877: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
                   1878: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
                   1879: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
                   1880: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
                   1881: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
                   1882: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
                   1883: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
                   1884: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
                   1885: \def\chapecsize{1728}
                   1886: 
                   1887: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
                   1888: \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
                   1889: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   1890: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
                   1891: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
                   1892: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
                   1893: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
                   1894: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   1895: \let\secbf\secrm
                   1896: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
                   1897: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
                   1898: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
                   1899: \def\sececsize{1440}
                   1900: 
                   1901: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
                   1902: \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
                   1903: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
                   1904: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
                   1905: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
                   1906: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
                   1907: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
                   1908: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
                   1909: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
                   1910: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
                   1911: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
                   1912: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
                   1913: \def\ssececsize{1200}
                   1914: 
                   1915: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
                   1916: \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
                   1917: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   1918: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   1919: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   1920: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
                   1921: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   1922: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   1923: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   1924: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   1925: \font\reducedi=cmmi10
                   1926: \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
                   1927: \def\reducedecsize{1000}
                   1928: 
                   1929: \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
                   1930: \textfonts            % reset the current fonts
                   1931: \rm
                   1932: } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
                   1933: 
                   1934: 
                   1935: % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
                   1936: % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit.  This is for the GNU
                   1937: % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual.  Maybe other manuals in the
                   1938: % future.  Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
                   1939: %
                   1940: \def\definetextfontsizex{%
                   1941: % Text fonts (10pt).
                   1942: \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
                   1943: \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
                   1944: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1945: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
                   1946: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1947: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
                   1948: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1949: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1950: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
                   1951: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
                   1952: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
                   1953: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
                   1954: \def\textecsize{1000}
                   1955: 
                   1956: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
                   1957: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
                   1958: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
                   1959: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
                   1960: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
                   1961: 
                   1962: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
                   1963: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
                   1964: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   1965: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   1966: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
                   1967: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
                   1968: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   1969: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   1970: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
                   1971: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
                   1972: \font\smalli=cmmi9
                   1973: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
                   1974: \def\smallecsize{0900}
                   1975: 
                   1976: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
                   1977: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
                   1978: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
                   1979: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   1980: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
                   1981: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
                   1982: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
                   1983: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
                   1984: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
                   1985: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
                   1986: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
                   1987: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
                   1988: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
                   1989: 
                   1990: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
                   1991: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
                   1992: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
                   1993: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
                   1994: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
                   1995: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
                   1996: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
                   1997: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   1998: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
                   1999: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
                   2000: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
                   2001: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
                   2002: \def\titleecsize{2074}
                   2003: 
                   2004: % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
                   2005: \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
                   2006: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   2007: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
                   2008: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
                   2009: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
                   2010: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
                   2011: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   2012: \let\chapbf\chaprm
                   2013: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
                   2014: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
                   2015: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
                   2016: \def\chapecsize{1440}
                   2017: 
                   2018: % Section fonts (12pt).
                   2019: \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
                   2020: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
                   2021: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
                   2022: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   2023: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   2024: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
                   2025: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
                   2026: \let\secbf\secrm
                   2027: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
                   2028: \font\seci=cmmi12
                   2029: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
                   2030: \def\sececsize{1200}
                   2031: 
                   2032: % Subsection fonts (10pt).
                   2033: \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
                   2034: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   2035: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
                   2036: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   2037: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   2038: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   2039: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   2040: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
                   2041: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
                   2042: \font\sseci=cmmi10
                   2043: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
                   2044: \def\ssececsize{1000}
                   2045: 
                   2046: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
                   2047: \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
                   2048: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   2049: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   2050: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
                   2051: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
                   2052: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   2053: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
                   2054: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
                   2055: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
                   2056: \font\reducedi=cmmi9
                   2057: \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
                   2058: \def\reducedecsize{0900}
                   2059: 
                   2060: \divide\parskip by 2  % reduce space between paragraphs
                   2061: \textleading = 12pt   % line spacing for 10pt CM
                   2062: \textfonts            % reset the current fonts
                   2063: \rm
                   2064: } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
                   2065: 
                   2066: 
                   2067: % We provide the user-level command
                   2068: %   @fonttextsize 10
                   2069: % (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
                   2070: %
                   2071: \def\xiword{11}
                   2072: \def\xword{10}
                   2073: \def\xwordpt{10pt}
                   2074: %
                   2075: \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
                   2076:   \def\textsizearg{#1}%
                   2077:   %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
                   2078:   %
                   2079:   % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
                   2080:   % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
                   2081:   %
                   2082:  \begingroup \globaldefs=1
                   2083:   \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
                   2084:   \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
                   2085:   \else
                   2086:     \errhelp=\EMsimple
                   2087:     \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
                   2088:   \fi\fi
                   2089:  \endgroup
                   2090: }
                   2091: 
                   2092: 
                   2093: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
                   2094: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
                   2095: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
                   2096: % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
                   2097: % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
                   2098: %
                   2099: \def\resetmathfonts{%
                   2100:   \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
                   2101:   \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
                   2102:   \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
                   2103: }
                   2104: 
                   2105: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
                   2106: % of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
                   2107: % current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
                   2108: % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
                   2109: %
                   2110: % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
                   2111: % and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
                   2112: % the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
                   2113: %
                   2114: % This all needs generalizing, badly.
                   2115: %
                   2116: \def\textfonts{%
                   2117:   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
                   2118:   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
                   2119:   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
                   2120:   \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
                   2121:   \def\curfontsize{text}%
                   2122:   \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
                   2123:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
                   2124: \def\titlefonts{%
                   2125:   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
                   2126:   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
                   2127:   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
                   2128:   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
                   2129:   \def\curfontsize{title}%
                   2130:   \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
                   2131:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
                   2132: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
                   2133: \def\chapfonts{%
                   2134:   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
                   2135:   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
                   2136:   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
                   2137:   \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
                   2138:   \def\curfontsize{chap}%
                   2139:   \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
                   2140:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
                   2141: \def\secfonts{%
                   2142:   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
                   2143:   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
                   2144:   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
                   2145:   \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
                   2146:   \def\curfontsize{sec}%
                   2147:   \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
                   2148:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
                   2149: \def\subsecfonts{%
                   2150:   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
                   2151:   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
                   2152:   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
                   2153:   \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
                   2154:   \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
                   2155:   \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
                   2156:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
                   2157: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
                   2158: \def\reducedfonts{%
                   2159:   \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
                   2160:   \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
                   2161:   \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
                   2162:   \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
                   2163:   \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
                   2164:   \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
                   2165:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
                   2166: \def\smallfonts{%
                   2167:   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
                   2168:   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
                   2169:   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
                   2170:   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
                   2171:   \def\curfontsize{small}%
                   2172:   \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
                   2173:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
                   2174: \def\smallerfonts{%
                   2175:   \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
                   2176:   \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
                   2177:   \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
                   2178:   \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
                   2179:   \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
                   2180:   \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
                   2181:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
                   2182: 
                   2183: % Fonts for short table of contents.
                   2184: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
                   2185: \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}  % no cmb12
                   2186: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
                   2187: \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
                   2188: 
                   2189: % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
                   2190: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
                   2191: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
                   2192: 
                   2193: % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
                   2194: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
                   2195: 
                   2196: % About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
                   2197: % can fit this many characters:
                   2198: %   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
                   2199: % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
                   2200: %   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
                   2201: % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
                   2202: % the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
                   2203: %
                   2204: % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
                   2205: %   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
                   2206: % --karl, 24jan03.
                   2207: 
                   2208: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
                   2209: %
                   2210: \definetextfontsizexi
                   2211: 
                   2212: 
                   2213: \message{markup,}
                   2214: 
                   2215: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
                   2216: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
                   2217: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
                   2218: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
                   2219: %
                   2220: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
                   2221: 
                   2222: % Markup style infrastructure.  \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
                   2223: % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
                   2224: % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
                   2225: % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
                   2226: % currently in effect.
                   2227: \newif\ifmarkupvar
                   2228: \newif\ifmarkupsamp
                   2229: \newif\ifmarkupkey
                   2230: %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
                   2231: %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
                   2232: \newif\ifmarkupcode
                   2233: \newif\ifmarkupkbd
                   2234: %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
                   2235: %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
                   2236: \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
                   2237: \newif\ifmarkupexample
                   2238: \newif\ifmarkupverb
                   2239: \newif\ifmarkupverbatim
                   2240: 
                   2241: \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
                   2242: 
                   2243: \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
                   2244:   \csname markup#1true\endcsname
                   2245:   \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
                   2246:   \markupstylesetup
                   2247: }
                   2248: 
                   2249: \let\markupstylesetup\empty
                   2250: 
                   2251: \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
                   2252:   \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
                   2253:     \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
                   2254:   \def#1%
                   2255: }
                   2256: 
                   2257: % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
                   2258: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
                   2259:   \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
                   2260:     \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
                   2261:   \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
                   2262: }
                   2263: 
                   2264: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
                   2265:   \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
                   2266:     \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
                   2267:   \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
                   2268: }
                   2269: 
                   2270: {
                   2271: \catcode`\'=\active
                   2272: \catcode`\`=\active
                   2273: 
                   2274: \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
                   2275: \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
                   2276: 
                   2277: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
                   2278: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
                   2279: }
                   2280: 
                   2281: \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
                   2282: \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
                   2283: %
                   2284: \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
                   2285: \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
                   2286: %
                   2287: \let\markupsetuplqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteleft
                   2288: \let\markupsetuprqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteright
                   2289: %
                   2290: \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
                   2291: \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
                   2292: %
                   2293: \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
                   2294: \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
                   2295: %
                   2296: \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
                   2297: \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
                   2298: 
                   2299: % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
                   2300: % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
                   2301: % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
                   2302: % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
                   2303: % lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
                   2304: %
                   2305: \def\codequoteright{%
                   2306:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
                   2307:     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
                   2308:       '%
                   2309:     \else \char'15 \fi
                   2310:   \else \char'15 \fi
                   2311: }
                   2312: %
                   2313: % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
                   2314: % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
                   2315: % the code environments to do likewise.
                   2316: %
                   2317: \def\codequoteleft{%
                   2318:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
                   2319:     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
                   2320:       % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
                   2321:       % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
                   2322:       \relax`%
                   2323:     \else \char'22 \fi
                   2324:   \else \char'22 \fi
                   2325: }
                   2326: 
                   2327: % Commands to set the quote options.
                   2328: % 
                   2329: \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
                   2330:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   2331:   \ifx\temp\onword
                   2332:     \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
                   2333:       = t%
                   2334:   \else\ifx\temp\offword
                   2335:     \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
                   2336:       = \relax
                   2337:   \else
                   2338:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   2339:     \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
                   2340:   \fi\fi
                   2341: }
                   2342: %
                   2343: \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
                   2344:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   2345:   \ifx\temp\onword
                   2346:     \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
                   2347:       = t%
                   2348:   \else\ifx\temp\offword
                   2349:     \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
                   2350:       = \relax
                   2351:   \else
                   2352:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   2353:     \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
                   2354:   \fi\fi
                   2355: }
                   2356: 
                   2357: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
                   2358: \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
                   2359: 
                   2360: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
                   2361: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
                   2362: 
                   2363: % Font commands.
                   2364: 
                   2365: % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
                   2366: % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
                   2367: % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
                   2368: \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
                   2369:   \ifusingtt 
                   2370:     {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
                   2371:     {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
                   2372:   \next
                   2373: }
                   2374: \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
                   2375: \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
                   2376: 
                   2377: % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
                   2378: % character) is such as not to need one.
                   2379: \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
                   2380:   \ifx\next,%
                   2381:   \else\ifx\next-%
                   2382:   \else\ifx\next.%
                   2383:   \else\ifx\next\.%
                   2384:   \else\ifx\next\comma%
                   2385:   \else\ptexslash
                   2386:   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
                   2387:   \aftersmartic
                   2388: }
                   2389: 
                   2390: % Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic.  @var is set to this for defuns.
                   2391: \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
                   2392: 
                   2393: % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
                   2394: % ttsl for book titles, do we?
                   2395: \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
                   2396: 
                   2397: \def\aftersmartic{}
                   2398: \def\var#1{%
                   2399:   \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
                   2400:   \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
                   2401:   \smartslanted{#1}%
                   2402: }
                   2403: 
                   2404: \let\i=\smartitalic
                   2405: \let\slanted=\smartslanted
                   2406: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
                   2407: \let\emph=\smartitalic
                   2408: 
                   2409: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
                   2410: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
                   2411: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
                   2412: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
                   2413: 
                   2414: % @b, explicit bold.  Also @strong.
                   2415: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
                   2416: \let\strong=\b
                   2417: 
                   2418: % @sansserif, explicit sans.
                   2419: \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
                   2420: 
                   2421: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
                   2422: % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
                   2423: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
                   2424: %
                   2425: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
                   2426: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
                   2427: 
                   2428: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
                   2429: % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
                   2430: % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
                   2431: %
                   2432: \catcode`@=11
                   2433:   \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
                   2434:     \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
                   2435:     \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
                   2436:     \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
                   2437:   }
                   2438:   \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
                   2439:     \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
                   2440:     \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
                   2441:     \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
                   2442:   }
                   2443: \catcode`@=\other
                   2444: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
                   2445: 
                   2446: % @t, explicit typewriter.
                   2447: \def\t#1{%
                   2448:   {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
                   2449:   \null
                   2450: }
                   2451: 
                   2452: % @samp.
                   2453: \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
                   2454: 
                   2455: % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
                   2456: \let\indicateurl=\samp
                   2457: 
                   2458: % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
                   2459: % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
                   2460: % This is a subroutine for that.
                   2461: \def\tclose#1{%
                   2462:   {%
                   2463:     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
                   2464:     \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
                   2465:     %
                   2466:     % Switch to typewriter.
                   2467:     \tt
                   2468:     %
                   2469:     % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
                   2470:     \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
                   2471:     %
                   2472:     % Turn off hyphenation.
                   2473:     \nohyphenation
                   2474:     %
                   2475:     \rawbackslash
                   2476:     \plainfrenchspacing
                   2477:     #1%
                   2478:   }%
                   2479:   \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
                   2480: }
                   2481: 
                   2482: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
                   2483: % (But see \codedashfinish below.)
                   2484: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
                   2485: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
                   2486: %
                   2487: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
                   2488: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
                   2489: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
                   2490: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
                   2491: {
                   2492:   \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
                   2493:   \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
                   2494:   \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq  % default definitions
                   2495:   %
                   2496:   \global\def\code{\begingroup
                   2497:     \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
                   2498:     % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
                   2499:     \catcode\dashChar=\active  \catcode\underChar=\active
                   2500:     \ifallowcodebreaks
                   2501:      \let-\codedash
                   2502:      \let_\codeunder
                   2503:     \else
                   2504:      \let-\normaldash
                   2505:      \let_\realunder
                   2506:     \fi
                   2507:     % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
                   2508:     % after the hyphen.
                   2509:     \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
                   2510:     %
                   2511:     \codex
                   2512:   }
                   2513:   %
                   2514:   \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
                   2515:   \gdef\codedashfinish{%
                   2516:     \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
                   2517:     % 
                   2518:     % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
                   2519:     % (a) the next character is a -, or
                   2520:     % (b) the preceding character is a -.
                   2521:     % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
                   2522:     % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
                   2523:     \ifx\next\codedash \else
                   2524:       \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 
                   2525:       \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
                   2526:     \fi
                   2527:     % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
                   2528:     % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise.  As in @code{- a}.
                   2529:     \global\let\codedashprev= \next
                   2530:   }
                   2531: }
                   2532: \def\normaldash{-}
                   2533: %
                   2534: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
                   2535: 
                   2536: \def\codeunder{%
                   2537:   % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
                   2538:   % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
                   2539:   % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
                   2540:   % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
                   2541:   \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
                   2542:                \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
                   2543:              \else\normalunderscore \fi
                   2544:              \discretionary{}{}{}}%
                   2545:             {\_}%
                   2546: }
                   2547: 
                   2548: % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
                   2549: % each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is bad.
                   2550: % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
                   2551: % and _ on and off.
                   2552: %
                   2553: \newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
                   2554: 
                   2555: \def\keywordtrue{true}
                   2556: \def\keywordfalse{false}
                   2557: 
                   2558: \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
                   2559:   \def\txiarg{#1}%
                   2560:   \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
                   2561:     \allowcodebreakstrue
                   2562:   \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
                   2563:     \allowcodebreaksfalse
                   2564:   \else
                   2565:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   2566:     \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
                   2567:   \fi\fi
                   2568: }
                   2569: 
                   2570: % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
                   2571: % so use \code rather than \samp.
                   2572: \let\command=\code
                   2573: \let\env=\code
                   2574: \let\file=\code
                   2575: \let\option=\code
                   2576: 
                   2577: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
                   2578: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
                   2579: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
                   2580: % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
                   2581: % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
                   2582: % for comparison.)
                   2583: \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
                   2584: \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
                   2585:   \unsepspaces
                   2586:   \pdfurl{#1}%
                   2587:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
                   2588:   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
                   2589:     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
                   2590:   \else
                   2591:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
                   2592:     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
                   2593:       \ifpdf
                   2594:         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
                   2595:       \else
                   2596:         \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
                   2597:       \fi
                   2598:     \else
                   2599:       \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
                   2600:     \fi
                   2601:   \fi
                   2602:   \endlink
                   2603: \endgroup}
                   2604: 
                   2605: % This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
                   2606: \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
                   2607: \let\uref=\urefbreak
                   2608: \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
                   2609: \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
                   2610:   \unsepspaces
                   2611:   \pdfurl{#1}%
                   2612:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
                   2613:   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
                   2614:     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
                   2615:   \else
                   2616:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
                   2617:     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
                   2618:       \ifpdf
                   2619:         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
                   2620:       \else
                   2621:         \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
                   2622:       \fi
                   2623:     \else
                   2624:       \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
                   2625:     \fi
                   2626:   \fi
                   2627:   \endlink
                   2628: \endgroup}
                   2629: 
                   2630: % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
                   2631: \def\urefcatcodes{%
                   2632:   \catcode\ampChar=\active   \catcode\dotChar=\active
                   2633:   \catcode\hashChar=\active  \catcode\questChar=\active
                   2634:   \catcode\slashChar=\active
                   2635: }
                   2636: {
                   2637:   \urefcatcodes
                   2638:   %
                   2639:   \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
                   2640:     \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
                   2641:     \urefcatcodes
                   2642:     \let&\urefcodeamp
                   2643:     \let.\urefcodedot
                   2644:     \let#\urefcodehash
                   2645:     \let?\urefcodequest
                   2646:     \let/\urefcodeslash
                   2647:     \codex
                   2648:   }
                   2649:   %
                   2650:   % By default, they are just regular characters.
                   2651:   \global\def&{\normalamp}
                   2652:   \global\def.{\normaldot}
                   2653:   \global\def#{\normalhash}
                   2654:   \global\def?{\normalquest}
                   2655:   \global\def/{\normalslash}
                   2656: }
                   2657: 
                   2658: % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
                   2659: % line breaking of long url's.  The unequal skips make look better in
                   2660: % cmtt at least, especially for dots.
                   2661: \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
                   2662: \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
                   2663: %
                   2664: \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
                   2665: \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
                   2666: \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
                   2667: \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
                   2668: \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
                   2669: {
                   2670:   \catcode`\/=\active
                   2671:   \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
                   2672:     \urefprestretch \slashChar
                   2673:     % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
                   2674:     % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
                   2675:     \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
                   2676:   }
                   2677: }
                   2678: 
                   2679: % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
                   2680: % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
                   2681: % allow that.  Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
                   2682: % 
                   2683: \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
                   2684:   \def\txiarg{#1}%
                   2685:   \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
                   2686:     \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
                   2687:   \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
                   2688:     \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
                   2689:   \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
                   2690:     \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
                   2691:   \else
                   2692:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   2693:     \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
                   2694:   \fi\fi\fi
                   2695: }
                   2696: \def\wordafter{after}
                   2697: \def\wordbefore{before}
                   2698: \def\wordnone{none}
                   2699: 
                   2700: \urefbreakstyle after
                   2701: 
                   2702: % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
                   2703: %
                   2704: \let\url=\uref
                   2705: 
                   2706: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
                   2707: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
                   2708: %
                   2709: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
                   2710: \ifpdf
                   2711:   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
                   2712:   \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
                   2713:     \unsepspaces
                   2714:     \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
                   2715:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
                   2716:     \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
                   2717:     \endlink
                   2718:   \endgroup}
                   2719: \else
                   2720:   \let\email=\uref
                   2721: \fi
                   2722: 
                   2723: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
                   2724: %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
                   2725: %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
                   2726: \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
                   2727:   \def\txiarg{#1}%
                   2728:   \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
                   2729:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
                   2730:   \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
                   2731:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
                   2732:   \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
                   2733:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
                   2734:   \else
                   2735:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   2736:     \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
                   2737:   \fi\fi\fi
                   2738: }
                   2739: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
                   2740: \def\wordexample{example}
                   2741: \def\wordcode{code}
                   2742: 
                   2743: % Default is `distinct'.
                   2744: \kbdinputstyle distinct
                   2745: 
                   2746: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
                   2747: % then @kbd has no effect.
                   2748: \def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
                   2749: 
                   2750: \def\xkey{\key}
                   2751: \def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
                   2752:   \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
                   2753:   \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
                   2754:   \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
                   2755:   \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
                   2756: }
                   2757: 
                   2758: % definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
                   2759: %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
                   2760: %\font\keysy=cmsy9
                   2761: %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
                   2762: %  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
                   2763: %    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
                   2764: %     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
                   2765: %    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
                   2766: %  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
                   2767: 
                   2768: % definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
                   2769: % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
                   2770: % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
                   2771: %
                   2772: \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
                   2773:   \nohyphenation
                   2774:   \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
                   2775:   #1}\null}
                   2776: 
                   2777: % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
                   2778: \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
                   2779: 
                   2780: % @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
                   2781: \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
                   2782: \def\click{\arrow}
                   2783: 
                   2784: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
                   2785: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
                   2786: %
                   2787: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
                   2788: 
                   2789: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
                   2790: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
                   2791: % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
                   2792: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
                   2793: 
                   2794: % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
                   2795: % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
                   2796: % all-uppercase.
                   2797: %
                   2798: \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
                   2799: \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
                   2800:   {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
                   2801:   \def\temp{#2}%
                   2802:   \ifx\temp\empty \else
                   2803:     \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
                   2804:   \fi
                   2805:   \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
                   2806: }
                   2807: 
                   2808: % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
                   2809: % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
                   2810: %
                   2811: \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
                   2812: \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
                   2813:   {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
                   2814:   \def\temp{#2}%
                   2815:   \ifx\temp\empty \else
                   2816:     \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
                   2817:   \fi
                   2818:   \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
                   2819: }
                   2820: 
                   2821: % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
                   2822: %
                   2823: \def\asis#1{#1}
                   2824: 
                   2825: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
                   2826: %
                   2827: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
                   2828: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
                   2829: % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
                   2830: % which is what @var uses.
                   2831: {
                   2832:   \catcode`\_ = \active
                   2833:   \gdef\mathunderscore{%
                   2834:     \catcode`\_=\active
                   2835:     \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
                   2836:   }
                   2837: }
                   2838: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
                   2839: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
                   2840: % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
                   2841: %
                   2842: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
                   2843: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
                   2844: %
                   2845: \def\math{%
                   2846:   \tex
                   2847:   \mathunderscore
                   2848:   \let\\ = \mathbackslash
                   2849:   \mathactive
                   2850:   % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
                   2851:   \let\"=\ddot
                   2852:   \let\'=\acute
                   2853:   \let\==\bar
                   2854:   \let\^=\hat
                   2855:   \let\`=\grave
                   2856:   \let\u=\breve
                   2857:   \let\v=\check
                   2858:   \let\~=\tilde
                   2859:   \let\dotaccent=\dot
                   2860:   $\finishmath
                   2861: }
                   2862: \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
                   2863: 
                   2864: % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
                   2865: % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
                   2866: % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
                   2867: %
                   2868: {
                   2869:   \catcode`^ = \active
                   2870:   \catcode`< = \active
                   2871:   \catcode`> = \active
                   2872:   \catcode`+ = \active
                   2873:   \catcode`' = \active
                   2874:   \gdef\mathactive{%
                   2875:     \let^ = \ptexhat
                   2876:     \let< = \ptexless
                   2877:     \let> = \ptexgtr
                   2878:     \let+ = \ptexplus
                   2879:     \let' = \ptexquoteright
                   2880:   }
                   2881: }
                   2882: 
                   2883: % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
                   2884: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
                   2885: 
                   2886: % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
                   2887: % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
                   2888: % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
                   2889: % 
                   2890: \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
                   2891: %
                   2892: \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
                   2893: \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
                   2894:   \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
                   2895:   \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
                   2896: }
                   2897: % 
                   2898: % @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
                   2899: % FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
                   2900: \long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
                   2901: \long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
                   2902:   \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
                   2903:   \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
                   2904: }
                   2905: %
                   2906: % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
                   2907: % setting catcodes prematurely.  Doing it this way means that, for
                   2908: % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
                   2909: % ignored.  But this isn't important because if people want a literal
                   2910: % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
                   2911: % well use a command to get a left brace too.  We could re-use the
                   2912: % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
                   2913: % 
                   2914: \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
                   2915: \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
                   2916: \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
                   2917:   \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
                   2918:   \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
                   2919:   \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
                   2920: }
                   2921: 
                   2922: % @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
                   2923: %
                   2924: \long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
                   2925: \long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
                   2926:   \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
                   2927:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
                   2928:   \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
                   2929: }
                   2930: 
                   2931: % @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
                   2932: %
                   2933: \long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
                   2934: \long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
                   2935:   \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
                   2936:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
                   2937: }
                   2938: 
                   2939: 
                   2940: \message{glyphs,}
                   2941: % and logos.
                   2942: 
                   2943: % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
                   2944: \def\@{\char64 }
                   2945: \let\atchar=\@
                   2946: 
                   2947: % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
                   2948: % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
                   2949: % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
                   2950: \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
                   2951: \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
                   2952: \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
                   2953: \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
                   2954: \begingroup
                   2955:   % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
                   2956:   % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
                   2957:   \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
                   2958:   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
                   2959:   \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
                   2960:   !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
                   2961:   !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
                   2962:   !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
                   2963:   !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
                   2964: !endgroup
                   2965: 
                   2966: % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
                   2967: \let\comma = ,
                   2968: 
                   2969: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
                   2970: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
                   2971: \let\, = \ptexc
                   2972: \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
                   2973: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
                   2974: \let\tieaccent = \ptext
                   2975: \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
                   2976: \let\udotaccent = \d
                   2977: 
                   2978: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
                   2979: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
                   2980: \def\questiondown{?`}
                   2981: \def\exclamdown{!`}
                   2982: \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
                   2983: \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
                   2984: 
                   2985: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
                   2986: \def\imacro{i}
                   2987: \def\jmacro{j}
                   2988: \def\dotless#1{%
                   2989:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   2990:   \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
                   2991:   \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
                   2992:   \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
                   2993:   \fi\fi
                   2994: }
                   2995: 
                   2996: % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
                   2997: % period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
                   2998: %
                   2999: \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
                   3000: 
                   3001: % @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
                   3002: % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
                   3003: % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
                   3004: % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
                   3005: % \scriptscriptstyle).
                   3006: %
                   3007: \def\LaTeX{%
                   3008:   L\kern-.36em
                   3009:   {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
                   3010:    \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
                   3011:      \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
                   3012:        % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
                   3013:        % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
                   3014:        \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
                   3015:      \else
                   3016:        % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
                   3017:        \selectfonts\lllsize A%
                   3018:      \fi
                   3019:      }%
                   3020:      \vss
                   3021:   }}%
                   3022:   \kern-.15em
                   3023:   \TeX
                   3024: }
                   3025: 
                   3026: % Some math mode symbols.
                   3027: \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
                   3028: \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
                   3029: \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
                   3030: \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
                   3031: 
                   3032: % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
                   3033: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
                   3034: % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
                   3035: % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
                   3036: % whichever is larger.
                   3037: %
                   3038: \def\dots{%
                   3039:   \leavevmode
                   3040:   \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
                   3041:   \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
                   3042:     \dimen0 = \wd0
                   3043:   \else
                   3044:     \dimen0 = 1.5em
                   3045:   \fi
                   3046:   \hbox to \dimen0{%
                   3047:     \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
                   3048:     .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
                   3049:     .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
                   3050:     .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
                   3051:   }%
                   3052: }
                   3053: 
                   3054: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
                   3055: %
                   3056: \def\enddots{%
                   3057:   \dots
                   3058:   \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
                   3059: }
                   3060: 
                   3061: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
                   3062: %
                   3063: % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
                   3064: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
                   3065: %
                   3066: \def\point{$\star$}
                   3067: \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
                   3068: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
                   3069: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
                   3070: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
                   3071: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
                   3072: 
                   3073: % The @error{} command.
                   3074: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
                   3075: %
                   3076: \newbox\errorbox
                   3077: %
                   3078: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
                   3079: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
                   3080: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
                   3081: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
                   3082: %
                   3083: \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
                   3084:    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
                   3085:    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
                   3086:    \vbox{%
                   3087:       \hrule height\dimen2
                   3088:       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
                   3089:          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
                   3090:          \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
                   3091:       \hrule height\dimen2}
                   3092:     \hfil}
                   3093: %
                   3094: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
                   3095: 
                   3096: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
                   3097: %
                   3098: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
                   3099: 
                   3100: % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
                   3101: % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
                   3102: % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
                   3103: % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
                   3104: % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
                   3105: %
                   3106: % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
                   3107: % that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
                   3108: % font height.
                   3109: %
                   3110: % feymr - regular
                   3111: % feymo - slanted
                   3112: % feybr - bold
                   3113: % feybo - bold slanted
                   3114: %
                   3115: % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
                   3116: % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
                   3117: % Hmm.
                   3118: %
                   3119: % Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
                   3120: % Hope not.
                   3121: %
                   3122: %
                   3123: \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
                   3124: \def\eurofont{%
                   3125:   % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
                   3126:   % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
                   3127:   % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
                   3128:   % font installed.
                   3129:   %
                   3130:   % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
                   3131:   % that to the current nominal size.
                   3132:   %
                   3133:   % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
                   3134:   % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
                   3135:   %
                   3136:   \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
                   3137:   %
                   3138:   \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
                   3139:     % bold:
                   3140:     \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
                   3141:   \else
                   3142:     % regular:
                   3143:     \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
                   3144:   \fi
                   3145:   \thiseurofont
                   3146: }
                   3147: 
                   3148: % Glyphs from the EC fonts.  We don't use \let for the aliases, because
                   3149: % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
                   3150: % the redefinition.
                   3151: %
                   3152: % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
                   3153: \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
                   3154: \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
                   3155: \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
                   3156: \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
                   3157: %
                   3158: \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
                   3159: \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
                   3160: \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
                   3161: \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
                   3162: \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
                   3163: \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
                   3164: \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
                   3165: \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
                   3166: %
                   3167: % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
                   3168: % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases.  We put the
                   3169: % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
                   3170: % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
                   3171: %
                   3172: % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
                   3173: % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
                   3174: % the same EC font.
                   3175: \def\ogonek#1{{%
                   3176:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   3177:   \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
                   3178:   \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
                   3179:   \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
                   3180:   \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
                   3181:   \else
                   3182:     \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
                   3183:     \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
                   3184:     \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
                   3185:     \fi
                   3186:   \fi\fi\fi\fi
                   3187:   }%
                   3188: }
                   3189: \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
                   3190: \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
                   3191: \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
                   3192: \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
                   3193: %
                   3194: % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
                   3195: \def\ecfont{%
                   3196:   % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
                   3197:   % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
                   3198:   % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
                   3199:   % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
                   3200:   \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
                   3201:   \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
                   3202:   \ifmonospace
                   3203:     % typewriter:
                   3204:     \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
                   3205:   \else
                   3206:     \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
                   3207:       % bold:
                   3208:       \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
                   3209:     \else
                   3210:       % regular:
                   3211:       \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
                   3212:     \fi
                   3213:   \fi
                   3214:   \thisecfont
                   3215: }
                   3216: 
                   3217: % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
                   3218: % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
                   3219: % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
                   3220: %
                   3221: \def\registeredsymbol{%
                   3222:   $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
                   3223:                \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
                   3224:     }$%
                   3225: }
                   3226: 
                   3227: % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
                   3228: %
                   3229: \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
                   3230: 
                   3231: % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
                   3232: %  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
                   3233: % so we'll define it if necessary.
                   3234: %
                   3235: \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
                   3236: \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
                   3237: \fi
                   3238: 
                   3239: % Quotes.
                   3240: \chardef\quotedblleft="5C
                   3241: \chardef\quotedblright=`\"
                   3242: \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
                   3243: \chardef\quoteright=`\'
                   3244: 
                   3245: 
                   3246: \message{page headings,}
                   3247: 
                   3248: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
                   3249: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
                   3250: 
                   3251: % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
                   3252: \newif\ifseenauthor
                   3253: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
                   3254: 
                   3255: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
                   3256: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
                   3257: %
                   3258: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
                   3259:  \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
                   3260: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
                   3261:  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
                   3262: 
                   3263: \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
                   3264:   \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
                   3265:   \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
                   3266: 
                   3267: \envdef\titlepage{%
                   3268:   % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
                   3269:   \begingroup
                   3270:     \parindent=0pt \textfonts
                   3271:     % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
                   3272:     \vglue\titlepagetopglue
                   3273:     % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
                   3274:     \finishedtitlepagetrue
                   3275:     %
                   3276:     % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
                   3277:     % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
                   3278:     \let\oldpage = \page
                   3279:     \def\page{%
                   3280:       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
                   3281:         \finishtitlepage
                   3282:       \fi
                   3283:       \let\page = \oldpage
                   3284:       \page
                   3285:       \null
                   3286:     }%
                   3287: }
                   3288: 
                   3289: \def\Etitlepage{%
                   3290:     \iffinishedtitlepage\else
                   3291:        \finishtitlepage
                   3292:     \fi
                   3293:     % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
                   3294:     % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
                   3295:     % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
                   3296:     % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
                   3297:     \oldpage
                   3298:   \endgroup
                   3299:   %
                   3300:   % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
                   3301:   % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
                   3302:   \HEADINGSon
                   3303:   %
                   3304:   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
                   3305:   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
                   3306:     \shortcontents
                   3307:     \contents
                   3308:     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
                   3309:     \global\let\contents = \relax
                   3310:   \fi
                   3311:   %
                   3312:   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
                   3313:     \contents
                   3314:     \global\let\contents = \relax
                   3315:     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
                   3316:   \fi
                   3317: }
                   3318: 
                   3319: \def\finishtitlepage{%
                   3320:   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
                   3321:   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
                   3322:   \finishedtitlepagetrue
                   3323: }
                   3324: 
                   3325: % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
                   3326: % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right.  This should be used
                   3327: % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first.  Because
                   3328: % it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold.  \par
                   3329: % should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
                   3330: % 
                   3331: \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
                   3332:   \rmisbold
                   3333:   \hyphenpenalty=10000
                   3334:   \parindent=0pt
                   3335:   \tolerance=5000
                   3336:   \ptexraggedright
                   3337: }
                   3338: 
                   3339: % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
                   3340: 
                   3341: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
                   3342: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
                   3343: 
                   3344: \parseargdef\title{%
                   3345:   \checkenv\titlepage
                   3346:   \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
                   3347:   % print a rule at the page bottom also.
                   3348:   \finishedtitlepagefalse
                   3349:   \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
                   3350: }
                   3351: 
                   3352: \parseargdef\subtitle{%
                   3353:   \checkenv\titlepage
                   3354:   {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
                   3355: }
                   3356: 
                   3357: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
                   3358: % It can also be used inside @quotation.
                   3359: %
                   3360: \parseargdef\author{%
                   3361:   \def\temp{\quotation}%
                   3362:   \ifx\thisenv\temp
                   3363:     \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
                   3364:   \else
                   3365:     \checkenv\titlepage
                   3366:     \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
                   3367:     {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
                   3368:   \fi
                   3369: }
                   3370: 
                   3371: 
                   3372: % Set up page headings and footings.
                   3373: 
                   3374: \let\thispage=\folio
                   3375: 
                   3376: \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
                   3377: \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
                   3378: \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
                   3379: \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
                   3380: 
                   3381: % Now make TeX use those variables
                   3382: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
                   3383:                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
                   3384: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
                   3385:                             \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
                   3386: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
                   3387: 
                   3388: % Commands to set those variables.
                   3389: % For example, this is what  @headings on  does
                   3390: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
                   3391: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
                   3392: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
                   3393: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
                   3394: 
                   3395: 
                   3396: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
                   3397: \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
                   3398: \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
                   3399: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
                   3400: 
                   3401: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
                   3402: \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
                   3403: \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
                   3404: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
                   3405: 
                   3406: \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
                   3407: 
                   3408: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
                   3409: \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
                   3410: \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
                   3411: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
                   3412: 
                   3413: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
                   3414: \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
                   3415: \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
                   3416:   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
                   3417:   %
                   3418:   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
                   3419:   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
                   3420:   \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
                   3421:   \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
                   3422: }
                   3423: 
                   3424: \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
                   3425: 
                   3426: % @evenheadingmarks top     \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
                   3427: % @evenheadingmarks bottom  \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
                   3428: %
                   3429: % The same set of arguments for:
                   3430: %
                   3431: % @oddheadingmarks
                   3432: % @evenfootingmarks
                   3433: % @oddfootingmarks
                   3434: % @everyheadingmarks
                   3435: % @everyfootingmarks
                   3436: 
                   3437: \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
                   3438: \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
                   3439: \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
                   3440: \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
                   3441: \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
                   3442:                           \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
                   3443: \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
                   3444:                           \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
                   3445: % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
                   3446: \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
                   3447:   \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
                   3448:   \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
                   3449: }
                   3450: 
                   3451: \everyheadingmarks bottom
                   3452: \everyfootingmarks bottom
                   3453: 
                   3454: % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
                   3455: % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
                   3456: % @headings off         turns them off.
                   3457: % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
                   3458: % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
                   3459: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
                   3460: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
                   3461: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
                   3462: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
                   3463: 
                   3464: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
                   3465: 
                   3466: \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
                   3467:   \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
                   3468:    \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
                   3469: }
                   3470: 
                   3471: \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
                   3472: \HEADINGSoff  % it's the default
                   3473: 
                   3474: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
                   3475: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
                   3476: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
                   3477: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
                   3478: % edge of all pages.
                   3479: \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
                   3480: \global\pageno=1
                   3481: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   3482: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   3483: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
                   3484: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   3485: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
                   3486: }
                   3487: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   3488: 
                   3489: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
                   3490: % page number on top right.
                   3491: \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
                   3492: \global\pageno=1
                   3493: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   3494: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   3495: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   3496: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   3497: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   3498: }
                   3499: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
                   3500: 
                   3501: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
                   3502: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
                   3503: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
                   3504: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   3505: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   3506: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
                   3507: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   3508: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
                   3509: }
                   3510: 
                   3511: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
                   3512: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
                   3513: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   3514: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   3515: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   3516: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   3517: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   3518: }
                   3519: 
                   3520: % Subroutines used in generating headings
                   3521: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
                   3522: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
                   3523: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
                   3524: \ifx\today\thisisundefined
                   3525: \def\today{%
                   3526:   \number\day\space
                   3527:   \ifcase\month
                   3528:   \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
                   3529:   \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
                   3530:   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
                   3531:   \fi
                   3532:   \space\number\year}
                   3533: \fi
                   3534: 
                   3535: % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
                   3536: % It generates no output of its own.
                   3537: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
                   3538: \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
                   3539: 
                   3540: 
                   3541: \message{tables,}
                   3542: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
                   3543: 
                   3544: % default indentation of table text
                   3545: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
                   3546: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
                   3547: \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
                   3548: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
                   3549: \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
                   3550: 
                   3551: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
                   3552: \newdimen\itemmax
                   3553: 
                   3554: % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
                   3555: % these defs.
                   3556: % They also define \itemindex
                   3557: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
                   3558: 
                   3559: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
                   3560: 
                   3561: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
                   3562: 
                   3563: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
                   3564: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
                   3565: 
                   3566: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
                   3567:   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
                   3568:   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
                   3569:   \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
                   3570:   \itemindex{#1}%
                   3571:   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
                   3572:   %
                   3573:   % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
                   3574:   % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
                   3575:   % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
                   3576:   % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
                   3577:   % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
                   3578:   \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
                   3579:     %
                   3580:     % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
                   3581:     % but leave it ragged-right.
                   3582:     \begingroup
                   3583:       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
                   3584:       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
                   3585:       \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
                   3586:       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
                   3587:     \endgroup
                   3588:     %
                   3589:     % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
                   3590:     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
                   3591:     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
                   3592:     %
                   3593:     % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
                   3594:     % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
                   3595:     % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
                   3596:     % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
                   3597:     % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
                   3598:     % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
                   3599:     %
                   3600:     \penalty 10001
                   3601:     \endgroup
                   3602:     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
                   3603:   \else
                   3604:     % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
                   3605:     % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
                   3606:     \noindent
                   3607:     % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
                   3608:     % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
                   3609:     % eventually be printed.
                   3610:     \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
                   3611:     \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
                   3612:     \unhbox0
                   3613:     \nobreak\kern\dimen0
                   3614:     \endgroup
                   3615:     \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
                   3616:   \fi
                   3617: }
                   3618: 
                   3619: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
                   3620: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
                   3621: 
                   3622: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
                   3623: \envdef\table{%
                   3624:   \let\itemindex\gobble
                   3625:   \tablecheck{table}%
                   3626: }
                   3627: \envdef\ftable{%
                   3628:   \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
                   3629:   \tablecheck{ftable}%
                   3630: }
                   3631: \envdef\vtable{%
                   3632:   \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
                   3633:   \tablecheck{vtable}%
                   3634: }
                   3635: \def\tablecheck#1{%
                   3636:   \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
                   3637:     \endgroup
                   3638:     \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
                   3639:       that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
                   3640:     \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
                   3641:   \else
                   3642:     \let\next\tablex
                   3643:   \fi
                   3644:   \next
                   3645: }
                   3646: \def\tablex#1{%
                   3647:   \def\itemindicate{#1}%
                   3648:   \parsearg\tabley
                   3649: }
                   3650: \def\tabley#1{%
                   3651:   {%
                   3652:     \makevalueexpandable
                   3653:     \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
                   3654:     \expandafter
                   3655:   }\temp \endtablez
                   3656: }
                   3657: \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
                   3658:   \aboveenvbreak
                   3659:   \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
                   3660:   \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
                   3661:   \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
                   3662:   \itemmax=\tableindent
                   3663:   \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
                   3664:   \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
                   3665:   \exdentamount=\tableindent
                   3666:   \parindent = 0pt
                   3667:   \parskip = \smallskipamount
                   3668:   \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
                   3669:   \let\item = \internalBitem
                   3670:   \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
                   3671: }
                   3672: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
                   3673: \let\Eftable\Etable
                   3674: \let\Evtable\Etable
                   3675: \let\Eitemize\Etable
                   3676: \let\Eenumerate\Etable
                   3677: 
                   3678: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
                   3679: 
                   3680: \newcount \itemno
                   3681: 
                   3682: \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
                   3683: 
                   3684: \def\doitemize#1{%
                   3685:   \aboveenvbreak
                   3686:   \itemmax=\itemindent
                   3687:   \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
                   3688:   \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
                   3689:   \exdentamount=\itemindent
                   3690:   \parindent=0pt
                   3691:   \parskip=\smallskipamount
                   3692:   \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
                   3693:   %
                   3694:   % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
                   3695:   % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
                   3696:   % right away at the @itemize.  It's not the best error message in the
                   3697:   % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item.  This means if
                   3698:   % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
                   3699:   \def\itemcontents{#1}%
                   3700:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
                   3701:   %
                   3702:   % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
                   3703:   \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
                   3704:   %
                   3705:   \let\item=\itemizeitem
                   3706: }
                   3707: 
                   3708: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
                   3709: %
                   3710: \def\itemizeitem{%
                   3711:   \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
                   3712:   {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
                   3713:   {%
                   3714:    % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
                   3715:    % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
                   3716:    % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
                   3717:    % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
                   3718:    % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
                   3719:    % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
                   3720:    % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
                   3721:    % that's the theory.
                   3722:    \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
                   3723:    \noindent
                   3724:    \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
                   3725:    %
                   3726:    \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
                   3727:   \flushcr
                   3728: }
                   3729: 
                   3730: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
                   3731: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
                   3732: %
                   3733: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
                   3734: 
                   3735: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
                   3736: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
                   3737: % argument is the same as `1'.
                   3738: %
                   3739: \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
                   3740: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
                   3741:   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
                   3742:   \def\thearg{#1}%
                   3743:   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
                   3744:   %
                   3745:   % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
                   3746:   % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
                   3747:   % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
                   3748:   % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
                   3749:   % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
                   3750:   \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
                   3751:   \ifx\rest\empty
                   3752:     % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
                   3753:     % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
                   3754:     % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
                   3755:     %   not equal to itself.
                   3756:     % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
                   3757:     %
                   3758:     % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
                   3759:     % continuing to look for a <number>.
                   3760:     %
                   3761:     \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
                   3762:       \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
                   3763:     \else
                   3764:       % It's a letter.
                   3765:       \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
                   3766:         \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
                   3767:       \else
                   3768:         \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
                   3769:       \fi
                   3770:     \fi
                   3771:   \else
                   3772:     % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
                   3773:     \numericenumerate
                   3774:   \fi
                   3775: }
                   3776: 
                   3777: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
                   3778: % given in \thearg.
                   3779: %
                   3780: \def\numericenumerate{%
                   3781:   \itemno = \thearg
                   3782:   \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
                   3783: }
                   3784: 
                   3785: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
                   3786: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
                   3787:   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
                   3788:   \startenumeration{%
                   3789:     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
                   3790:     \ifnum\itemno=0
                   3791:       \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
                   3792:                   alphabet}%
                   3793:     \fi
                   3794:     \char\lccode\itemno
                   3795:   }%
                   3796: }
                   3797: 
                   3798: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
                   3799: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
                   3800:   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
                   3801:   \startenumeration{%
                   3802:     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
                   3803:     \ifnum\itemno=0
                   3804:       \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
                   3805:                   alphabet}
                   3806:     \fi
                   3807:     \char\uccode\itemno
                   3808:   }%
                   3809: }
                   3810: 
                   3811: % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
                   3812: % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
                   3813: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
                   3814: %
                   3815: \def\startenumeration#1{%
                   3816:   \advance\itemno by -1
                   3817:   \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
                   3818: }
                   3819: 
                   3820: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
                   3821: % to @enumerate.
                   3822: %
                   3823: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
                   3824: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
                   3825: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
                   3826: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
                   3827: 
                   3828: 
                   3829: % @multitable macros
                   3830: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
                   3831: %
                   3832: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
                   3833: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
                   3834: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
                   3835: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
                   3836: 
                   3837: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
                   3838: 
                   3839: % To make preamble:
                   3840: %
                   3841: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
                   3842: %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
                   3843: %   @item ...
                   3844: %
                   3845: %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
                   3846: %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
                   3847: %   columns as desired.
                   3848: 
                   3849: 
                   3850: % Or use a template:
                   3851: %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
                   3852: %   @item ...
                   3853: %   using the widest term desired in each column.
                   3854: 
                   3855: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
                   3856: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
                   3857: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
                   3858: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
                   3859: 
                   3860: % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
                   3861: % if they are.
                   3862: 
                   3863: % Sample multitable:
                   3864: 
                   3865: %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
                   3866: %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
                   3867: %   @item
                   3868: %   first col stuff
                   3869: %   @tab
                   3870: %   second col stuff
                   3871: %   @tab
                   3872: %   third col
                   3873: %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
                   3874: %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
                   3875: %
                   3876: %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
                   3877: %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
                   3878: %   @end multitable
                   3879: 
                   3880: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
                   3881: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
                   3882: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
                   3883: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
                   3884: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
                   3885: %                                                            to baseline.
                   3886: %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
                   3887: %
                   3888: \newskip\multitableparskip
                   3889: \newskip\multitableparindent
                   3890: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
                   3891: \newskip\multitablelinespace
                   3892: \multitableparskip=0pt
                   3893: \multitableparindent=6pt
                   3894: \multitablecolspace=12pt
                   3895: \multitablelinespace=0pt
                   3896: 
                   3897: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
                   3898: %
                   3899: \let\endsetuptable\relax
                   3900: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
                   3901: \let\columnfractions\relax
                   3902: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
                   3903: \newif\ifsetpercent
                   3904: 
                   3905: % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
                   3906: % be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
                   3907: %
                   3908: \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
                   3909:   \global\advance\colcount by 1
                   3910:   \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
                   3911:   \setuptable
                   3912: }
                   3913: 
                   3914: \newcount\colcount
                   3915: \def\setuptable#1{%
                   3916:   \def\firstarg{#1}%
                   3917:   \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
                   3918:     \let\go = \relax
                   3919:   \else
                   3920:     \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
                   3921:       \global\setpercenttrue
                   3922:     \else
                   3923:       \ifsetpercent
                   3924:          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
                   3925:       \else
                   3926:          \global\advance\colcount by 1
                   3927:          \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
                   3928:                    % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
                   3929:          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
                   3930:       \fi
                   3931:     \fi
                   3932:     \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
                   3933:       % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
                   3934:       % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
                   3935:       \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
                   3936:     \else
                   3937:       \let\go = \setuptable
                   3938:     \fi%
                   3939:   \fi
                   3940:   \go
                   3941: }
                   3942: 
                   3943: % multitable-only commands.
                   3944: %
                   3945: % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
                   3946: % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
                   3947: % of an alignment entry.  \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
                   3948: % undo it ourselves.
                   3949: \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
                   3950: \def\headitem{%
                   3951:   \checkenv\multitable
                   3952:   \crcr
                   3953:   \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
                   3954:   \the\everytab % for the first item
                   3955: }%
                   3956: %
                   3957: % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
                   3958: % line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
                   3959: % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
                   3960: %                                      --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
                   3961: \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
                   3962: 
                   3963: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
                   3964: %
                   3965: \newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
                   3966: %
                   3967: \envdef\multitable{%
                   3968:   \vskip\parskip
                   3969:   \startsavinginserts
                   3970:   %
                   3971:   % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
                   3972:   % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
                   3973:   % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
                   3974:   % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
                   3975:   \def\item{\crcr}%
                   3976:   %
                   3977:   \tolerance=9500
                   3978:   \hbadness=9500
                   3979:   \setmultitablespacing
                   3980:   \parskip=\multitableparskip
                   3981:   \parindent=\multitableparindent
                   3982:   \overfullrule=0pt
                   3983:   \global\colcount=0
                   3984:   %
                   3985:   \everycr = {%
                   3986:     \noalign{%
                   3987:       \global\everytab={}%
                   3988:       \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
                   3989:       % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
                   3990:       \checkinserts
                   3991:       % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
                   3992:       %\filbreak
                   3993:        % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
                   3994:        % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
                   3995:        % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
                   3996:     }%
                   3997:   }%
                   3998:   %
                   3999:   \parsearg\domultitable
                   4000: }
                   4001: \def\domultitable#1{%
                   4002:   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
                   4003:   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
                   4004:   %
                   4005:   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
                   4006:   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
                   4007:   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
                   4008:   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
                   4009:   \halign\bgroup &%
                   4010:     \global\advance\colcount by 1
                   4011:     \multistrut
                   4012:     \vtop{%
                   4013:       % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
                   4014:       \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
                   4015:       %
                   4016:       % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
                   4017:       % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
                   4018:       % the first one.
                   4019:       %
                   4020:       % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
                   4021:       % to the width of each template entry.
                   4022:       %
                   4023:       % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
                   4024:       % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
                   4025:       % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
                   4026:       % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
                   4027:       %
                   4028:       % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
                   4029:       \rightskip=0pt
                   4030:       \ifnum\colcount=1
                   4031:        % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
                   4032:        \advance\hsize by\leftskip
                   4033:       \else
                   4034:        \ifsetpercent \else
                   4035:          % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
                   4036:          % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
                   4037:          \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
                   4038:        \fi
                   4039:        % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
                   4040:       \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
                   4041:       \fi
                   4042:       % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
                   4043:       % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
                   4044:       % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
                   4045:       % For example:
                   4046:       % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
                   4047:       % @item @code{#}
                   4048:       % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
                   4049:       % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
                   4050:       % marking characters.
                   4051:       \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
                   4052:     }\cr
                   4053: }
                   4054: \def\Emultitable{%
                   4055:   \crcr
                   4056:   \egroup % end the \halign
                   4057:   \global\setpercentfalse
                   4058: }
                   4059: 
                   4060: \def\setmultitablespacing{%
                   4061:   \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
                   4062:   %
                   4063:   % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
                   4064:   % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
                   4065:   % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
                   4066:   % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
                   4067: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
                   4068: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
                   4069: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
                   4070: \fi
                   4071: % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
                   4072: % table. If not, do nothing.
                   4073: %        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
                   4074: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
                   4075: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
                   4076: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
                   4077:                                       % than skip between lines in the table.
                   4078: \fi%
                   4079: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
                   4080: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
                   4081: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
                   4082:                                       % than skip between lines in the table.
                   4083: \fi}
                   4084: 
                   4085: 
                   4086: \message{conditionals,}
                   4087: 
                   4088: % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
                   4089: % @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
                   4090: % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
                   4091: % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
                   4092: % attempt to close an environment group.
                   4093: %
                   4094: \def\makecond#1{%
                   4095:   \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
                   4096:   \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
                   4097: }
                   4098: \makecond{iftex}
                   4099: \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
                   4100: \makecond{ifnothtml}
                   4101: \makecond{ifnotinfo}
                   4102: \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
                   4103: \makecond{ifnotxml}
                   4104: 
                   4105: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
                   4106: %
                   4107: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
                   4108: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
                   4109: \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
                   4110: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
                   4111: \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
                   4112: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
                   4113: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
                   4114: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
                   4115: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
                   4116: \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
                   4117: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
                   4118: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
                   4119: \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
                   4120: 
                   4121: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
                   4122: %
                   4123: % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
                   4124: \newcount\doignorecount
                   4125: 
                   4126: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
                   4127:   % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
                   4128:   \obeylines
                   4129:   \catcode`\@ = \other
                   4130:   \catcode`\{ = \other
                   4131:   \catcode`\} = \other
                   4132:   %
                   4133:   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
                   4134:   \spaceisspace
                   4135:   %
                   4136:   % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
                   4137:   \doignorecount = 0
                   4138:   %
                   4139:   % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
                   4140:   \dodoignore{#1}%
                   4141: }
                   4142: 
                   4143: { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
                   4144:   \obeylines %
                   4145:   %
                   4146:   \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
                   4147:     % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
                   4148:     %
                   4149:     % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
                   4150:     \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
                   4151:       \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
                   4152:     %
                   4153:     % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
                   4154:     % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
                   4155:     % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
                   4156:     \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
                   4157:     %
                   4158:     % And now expand that command.
                   4159:     \doignoretext ^^M%
                   4160:   }%
                   4161: }
                   4162: 
                   4163: \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
                   4164:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   4165:   \ifx\temp\empty                      % Nothing found.
                   4166:     \let\next\doignoretextzzz
                   4167:   \else                                        % Found a nested condition, ...
                   4168:     \advance\doignorecount by 1
                   4169:     \let\next\doignoretextyyy          % ..., look for another.
                   4170:     % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
                   4171:   \fi
                   4172:   \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
                   4173: }
                   4174: 
                   4175: % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
                   4176: %
                   4177: \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
                   4178:   \ifnum\doignorecount = 0     % We have just found the outermost @end.
                   4179:     \let\next\enddoignore
                   4180:   \else                                % Still inside a nested condition.
                   4181:     \advance\doignorecount by -1
                   4182:     \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
                   4183:   \fi
                   4184:   \next
                   4185: }
                   4186: 
                   4187: % Finish off ignored text.
                   4188: { \obeylines%
                   4189:   % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
                   4190:   % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
                   4191:   % would result in a blank line in the output.
                   4192:   \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
                   4193: }
                   4194: 
                   4195: 
                   4196: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
                   4197: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
                   4198: %
                   4199: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
                   4200: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
                   4201: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
                   4202: % didn't need it.
                   4203: % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
                   4204: %
                   4205: \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
                   4206: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
                   4207:   {%
                   4208:     \makevalueexpandable
                   4209:     \def\temp{#2}%
                   4210:     \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
                   4211:     \ifx\temp\empty
                   4212:       \next{}%
                   4213:     \else
                   4214:       \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
                   4215:     \fi
                   4216:   }%
                   4217: }
                   4218: % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
                   4219: \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
                   4220: 
                   4221: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
                   4222: %
                   4223: \parseargdef\clear{%
                   4224:   {%
                   4225:     \makevalueexpandable
                   4226:     \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
                   4227:   }%
                   4228: }
                   4229: 
                   4230: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
                   4231: \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
                   4232: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
                   4233: {
                   4234:   \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
                   4235:   %
                   4236:   \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
                   4237:     \let\value = \expandablevalue
                   4238:     % We don't want these characters active, ...
                   4239:     \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
                   4240:     % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
                   4241:     % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
                   4242:     % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
                   4243:     \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
                   4244:   }
                   4245: }
                   4246: 
                   4247: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
                   4248: % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
                   4249: % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
                   4250: % the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
                   4251: % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
                   4252: % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
                   4253: % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
                   4254: % 
                   4255: % Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value*
                   4256: % of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr
                   4257: % dot accent at position 126 instead).  No fix comes to mind, and it's
                   4258: % been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it.
                   4259: % 
                   4260: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
                   4261:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
                   4262:     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
                   4263:     \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
                   4264:   \else
                   4265:     \csname SET#1\endcsname
                   4266:   \fi
                   4267: }
                   4268: 
                   4269: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
                   4270: % with @set.
                   4271: % 
                   4272: % To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
                   4273: % \makecond and then redefine.
                   4274: %
                   4275: \makecond{ifset}
                   4276: \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
                   4277: \def\doifset#1#2{%
                   4278:   {%
                   4279:     \makevalueexpandable
                   4280:     \let\next=\empty
                   4281:     \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
                   4282:       #1% If not set, redefine \next.
                   4283:     \fi
                   4284:     \expandafter
                   4285:   }\next
                   4286: }
                   4287: \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
                   4288: 
                   4289: % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
                   4290: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
                   4291: %
                   4292: % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
                   4293: % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
                   4294: % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
                   4295: %
                   4296: \makecond{ifclear}
                   4297: \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
                   4298: \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
                   4299: 
                   4300: % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
                   4301: % without the @) is in fact defined.  We can only feasibly check at the
                   4302: % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
                   4303: % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
                   4304: % 
                   4305: \makecond{ifcommanddefined}
                   4306: \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
                   4307: %
                   4308: \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
                   4309:     \makevalueexpandable
                   4310:     \let\next=\empty
                   4311:     \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
                   4312:       #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
                   4313:     \fi
                   4314:     \expandafter
                   4315:   }\next
                   4316: }
                   4317: \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
                   4318: 
                   4319: % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
                   4320: \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
                   4321: \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
                   4322:   \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
                   4323: \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
                   4324: 
                   4325: % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
                   4326: % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
                   4327: \set txicommandconditionals
                   4328: 
                   4329: % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
                   4330: % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
                   4331: \let\dircategory=\comment
                   4332: 
                   4333: % @defininfoenclose.
                   4334: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
                   4335: 
                   4336: 
                   4337: \message{indexing,}
                   4338: % Index generation facilities
                   4339: 
                   4340: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
                   4341: % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
                   4342: \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
                   4343: 
                   4344: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
                   4345: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
                   4346: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
                   4347: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
                   4348: % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
                   4349: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
                   4350: % for the sake of vms.
                   4351: %
                   4352: \def\newindex#1{%
                   4353:   \iflinks
                   4354:     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
                   4355:     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
                   4356:   \fi
                   4357:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
                   4358:     \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
                   4359: }
                   4360: 
                   4361: % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
                   4362: %
                   4363: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
                   4364: 
                   4365: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
                   4366: %
                   4367: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
                   4368: %
                   4369: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
                   4370:   \iflinks
                   4371:     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
                   4372:     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
                   4373:   \fi
                   4374:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
                   4375:     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
                   4376: }
                   4377: 
                   4378: 
                   4379: % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
                   4380: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
                   4381: %
                   4382: % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
                   4383: % inside @code.
                   4384: %
                   4385: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
                   4386: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
                   4387: 
                   4388: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
                   4389: % #3 the target index (bar).
                   4390: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
                   4391:   % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
                   4392:   % closing the target index.
                   4393:   \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
                   4394:     % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
                   4395:     % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
                   4396:     \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
                   4397:     \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
                   4398:   \fi
                   4399:   % redefine \fooindfile:
                   4400:   \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
                   4401:   \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
                   4402:   % redefine \fooindex:
                   4403:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
                   4404: }
                   4405: 
                   4406: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
                   4407: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
                   4408: %  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
                   4409: 
                   4410: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
                   4411: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
                   4412: 
                   4413: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
                   4414: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
                   4415: 
                   4416: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
                   4417: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
                   4418: 
                   4419: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
                   4420: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
                   4421: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
                   4422: 
                   4423: % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
                   4424: % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
                   4425: % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
                   4426: %
                   4427: \def\indexdummies{%
                   4428:   \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
                   4429:   \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
                   4430:   \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
                   4431:   %
                   4432:   % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
                   4433:   % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text.  Also, more
                   4434:   % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
                   4435:   % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
                   4436:   % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  Perhaps we
                   4437:   % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
                   4438:   \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
                   4439:   \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
                   4440:   %
                   4441:   % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
                   4442:   % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
                   4443:   % causes processing to be prematurely terminated.  This is,
                   4444:   % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
                   4445:   % is an expandable command.  The redefinition below makes \endinput
                   4446:   % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
                   4447:   % processing continues to some further point.  On the other hand, it
                   4448:   % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
                   4449:   % is still getting written without apparent harm.
                   4450:   %
                   4451:   % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
                   4452:   % help-texinfo, 22may06):
                   4453:   % @macro funindex {WORD}
                   4454:   % @findex xyz
                   4455:   % @end macro
                   4456:   % ...
                   4457:   % @funindex commtest
                   4458:   %
                   4459:   % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
                   4460:   %
                   4461:   % Sample whatsit resulting:
                   4462:   % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
                   4463:   %
                   4464:   % So:
                   4465:   \let\endinput = \empty
                   4466:   %
                   4467:   % Do the redefinitions.
                   4468:   \commondummies
                   4469: }
                   4470: 
                   4471: % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
                   4472: % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
                   4473: % \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
                   4474: % this will be simpler.
                   4475: %
                   4476: \def\atdummies{%
                   4477:   \def\@{@@}%
                   4478:   \def\ {@ }%
                   4479:   \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
                   4480:   \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
                   4481:   %
                   4482:   % Do the redefinitions.
                   4483:   \commondummies
                   4484:   \otherbackslash
                   4485: }
                   4486: 
                   4487: % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
                   4488: %
                   4489: \def\commondummies{%
                   4490:   %
                   4491:   % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
                   4492:   % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control words,
                   4493:   % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
                   4494:   % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
                   4495:   % from whatever follows.
                   4496:   %
                   4497:   % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
                   4498:   % space.
                   4499:   %
                   4500:   % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
                   4501:   % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
                   4502:   % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
                   4503:   %
                   4504:   \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
                   4505:   \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
                   4506:   \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
                   4507:   %
                   4508:   \commondummiesnofonts
                   4509:   %
                   4510:   \definedummyletter\_%
                   4511:   \definedummyletter\-%
                   4512:   %
                   4513:   % Non-English letters.
                   4514:   \definedummyword\AA
                   4515:   \definedummyword\AE
                   4516:   \definedummyword\DH
                   4517:   \definedummyword\L
                   4518:   \definedummyword\O
                   4519:   \definedummyword\OE
                   4520:   \definedummyword\TH
                   4521:   \definedummyword\aa
                   4522:   \definedummyword\ae
                   4523:   \definedummyword\dh
                   4524:   \definedummyword\exclamdown
                   4525:   \definedummyword\l
                   4526:   \definedummyword\o
                   4527:   \definedummyword\oe
                   4528:   \definedummyword\ordf
                   4529:   \definedummyword\ordm
                   4530:   \definedummyword\questiondown
                   4531:   \definedummyword\ss
                   4532:   \definedummyword\th
                   4533:   %
                   4534:   % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
                   4535:   \definedummyword\bf
                   4536:   \definedummyword\gtr
                   4537:   \definedummyword\hat
                   4538:   \definedummyword\less
                   4539:   \definedummyword\sf
                   4540:   \definedummyword\sl
                   4541:   \definedummyword\tclose
                   4542:   \definedummyword\tt
                   4543:   %
                   4544:   \definedummyword\LaTeX
                   4545:   \definedummyword\TeX
                   4546:   %
                   4547:   % Assorted special characters.
                   4548:   \definedummyword\arrow
                   4549:   \definedummyword\bullet
                   4550:   \definedummyword\comma
                   4551:   \definedummyword\copyright
                   4552:   \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
                   4553:   \definedummyword\dots
                   4554:   \definedummyword\enddots
                   4555:   \definedummyword\entrybreak
                   4556:   \definedummyword\equiv
                   4557:   \definedummyword\error
                   4558:   \definedummyword\euro
                   4559:   \definedummyword\expansion
                   4560:   \definedummyword\geq
                   4561:   \definedummyword\guillemetleft
                   4562:   \definedummyword\guillemetright
                   4563:   \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
                   4564:   \definedummyword\guilsinglright
                   4565:   \definedummyword\lbracechar
                   4566:   \definedummyword\leq
                   4567:   \definedummyword\minus
                   4568:   \definedummyword\ogonek
                   4569:   \definedummyword\pounds
                   4570:   \definedummyword\point
                   4571:   \definedummyword\print
                   4572:   \definedummyword\quotedblbase
                   4573:   \definedummyword\quotedblleft
                   4574:   \definedummyword\quotedblright
                   4575:   \definedummyword\quoteleft
                   4576:   \definedummyword\quoteright
                   4577:   \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
                   4578:   \definedummyword\rbracechar
                   4579:   \definedummyword\result
                   4580:   \definedummyword\textdegree
                   4581:   %
                   4582:   % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
                   4583:   \macrolist
                   4584:   %
                   4585:   \normalturnoffactive
                   4586:   %
                   4587:   % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
                   4588:   % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
                   4589:   \makevalueexpandable
                   4590: }
                   4591: 
                   4592: % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
                   4593: %
                   4594: \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
                   4595:   % Control letters and accents.
                   4596:   \definedummyletter\!%
                   4597:   \definedummyaccent\"%
                   4598:   \definedummyaccent\'%
                   4599:   \definedummyletter\*%
                   4600:   \definedummyaccent\,%
                   4601:   \definedummyletter\.%
                   4602:   \definedummyletter\/%
                   4603:   \definedummyletter\:%
                   4604:   \definedummyaccent\=%
                   4605:   \definedummyletter\?%
                   4606:   \definedummyaccent\^%
                   4607:   \definedummyaccent\`%
                   4608:   \definedummyaccent\~%
                   4609:   \definedummyword\u
                   4610:   \definedummyword\v
                   4611:   \definedummyword\H
                   4612:   \definedummyword\dotaccent
                   4613:   \definedummyword\ogonek
                   4614:   \definedummyword\ringaccent
                   4615:   \definedummyword\tieaccent
                   4616:   \definedummyword\ubaraccent
                   4617:   \definedummyword\udotaccent
                   4618:   \definedummyword\dotless
                   4619:   %
                   4620:   % Texinfo font commands.
                   4621:   \definedummyword\b
                   4622:   \definedummyword\i
                   4623:   \definedummyword\r
                   4624:   \definedummyword\sansserif
                   4625:   \definedummyword\sc
                   4626:   \definedummyword\slanted
                   4627:   \definedummyword\t
                   4628:   %
                   4629:   % Commands that take arguments.
                   4630:   \definedummyword\abbr
                   4631:   \definedummyword\acronym
                   4632:   \definedummyword\anchor
                   4633:   \definedummyword\cite
                   4634:   \definedummyword\code
                   4635:   \definedummyword\command
                   4636:   \definedummyword\dfn
                   4637:   \definedummyword\dmn
                   4638:   \definedummyword\email
                   4639:   \definedummyword\emph
                   4640:   \definedummyword\env
                   4641:   \definedummyword\file
                   4642:   \definedummyword\image
                   4643:   \definedummyword\indicateurl
                   4644:   \definedummyword\inforef
                   4645:   \definedummyword\kbd
                   4646:   \definedummyword\key
                   4647:   \definedummyword\math
                   4648:   \definedummyword\option
                   4649:   \definedummyword\pxref
                   4650:   \definedummyword\ref
                   4651:   \definedummyword\samp
                   4652:   \definedummyword\strong
                   4653:   \definedummyword\tie
                   4654:   \definedummyword\uref
                   4655:   \definedummyword\url
                   4656:   \definedummyword\var
                   4657:   \definedummyword\verb
                   4658:   \definedummyword\w
                   4659:   \definedummyword\xref
                   4660: }
                   4661: 
                   4662: % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
                   4663: % by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
                   4664: % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
                   4665: % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
                   4666: %
                   4667: \def\indexnofonts{%
                   4668:   % Accent commands should become @asis.
                   4669:   \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
                   4670:   % We can just ignore other control letters.
                   4671:   \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
                   4672:   % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
                   4673:   \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
                   4674:   %
                   4675:   \commondummiesnofonts
                   4676:   %
                   4677:   % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
                   4678:   % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
                   4679:   % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
                   4680:   %\let\tt=\asis
                   4681:   %
                   4682:   \def\ { }%
                   4683:   \def\@{@}%
                   4684:   \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
                   4685:   \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
                   4686:   %
                   4687:   % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
                   4688:   % content at all.  So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
                   4689:   % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
                   4690:   \def\{{|a}%
                   4691:   \def\lbracechar{|a}%
                   4692:   %
                   4693:   \def\}{|b}%
                   4694:   \def\rbracechar{|b}%
                   4695:   %
                   4696:   % Non-English letters.
                   4697:   \def\AA{AA}%
                   4698:   \def\AE{AE}%
                   4699:   \def\DH{DZZ}%
                   4700:   \def\L{L}%
                   4701:   \def\OE{OE}%
                   4702:   \def\O{O}%
                   4703:   \def\TH{ZZZ}%
                   4704:   \def\aa{aa}%
                   4705:   \def\ae{ae}%
                   4706:   \def\dh{dzz}%
                   4707:   \def\exclamdown{!}%
                   4708:   \def\l{l}%
                   4709:   \def\oe{oe}%
                   4710:   \def\ordf{a}%
                   4711:   \def\ordm{o}%
                   4712:   \def\o{o}%
                   4713:   \def\questiondown{?}%
                   4714:   \def\ss{ss}%
                   4715:   \def\th{zzz}%
                   4716:   %
                   4717:   \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
                   4718:   \def\TeX{TeX}%
                   4719:   %
                   4720:   % Assorted special characters.
                   4721:   % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
                   4722:   \def\arrow{->}%
                   4723:   \def\bullet{bullet}%
                   4724:   \def\comma{,}%
                   4725:   \def\copyright{copyright}%
                   4726:   \def\dots{...}%
                   4727:   \def\enddots{...}%
                   4728:   \def\equiv{==}%
                   4729:   \def\error{error}%
                   4730:   \def\euro{euro}%
                   4731:   \def\expansion{==>}%
                   4732:   \def\geq{>=}%
                   4733:   \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
                   4734:   \def\guillemetright{>>}%
                   4735:   \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
                   4736:   \def\guilsinglright{>}%
                   4737:   \def\leq{<=}%
                   4738:   \def\minus{-}%
                   4739:   \def\point{.}%
                   4740:   \def\pounds{pounds}%
                   4741:   \def\print{-|}%
                   4742:   \def\quotedblbase{"}%
                   4743:   \def\quotedblleft{"}%
                   4744:   \def\quotedblright{"}%
                   4745:   \def\quoteleft{`}%
                   4746:   \def\quoteright{'}%
                   4747:   \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
                   4748:   \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
                   4749:   \def\result{=>}%
                   4750:   \def\textdegree{o}%
                   4751:   %
                   4752:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
                   4753:   \else \indexlquoteignore \fi
                   4754:   %
                   4755:   % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
                   4756:   % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
                   4757:   % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
                   4758:   % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
                   4759:   % that starts with \.
                   4760:   %
                   4761:   % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
                   4762:   % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
                   4763:   % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
                   4764:   %
                   4765:   \macrolist
                   4766: }
                   4767: 
                   4768: % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
                   4769: % ignore left quotes in the sort term.
                   4770: {\catcode`\`=\active
                   4771:  \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
                   4772: 
                   4773: \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
                   4774: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
                   4775: 
                   4776: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
                   4777: % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
                   4778: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
                   4779: 
                   4780: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
                   4781: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
                   4782: % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
                   4783: % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
                   4784: %
                   4785: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
                   4786:   \iflinks
                   4787:   {%
                   4788:     % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
                   4789:     \toks0 = {#2}%
                   4790:     % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
                   4791:     \def\thirdarg{#3}%
                   4792:     \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
                   4793:       \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
                   4794:     \fi
                   4795:     %
                   4796:     \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
                   4797:     %
                   4798:     \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
                   4799:   }%
                   4800:   \fi
                   4801: }
                   4802: 
                   4803: % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
                   4804: %
                   4805: \def\dosubindwrite{%
                   4806:   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
                   4807:   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
                   4808:     \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
                   4809:   \fi
                   4810:   %
                   4811:   % Remember, we are within a group.
                   4812:   \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
                   4813:   \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
                   4814:       % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
                   4815:   %
                   4816:   % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
                   4817:   % get the string to sort by.
                   4818:   {\indexnofonts
                   4819:    \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
                   4820:    \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
                   4821:   }%
                   4822:   %
                   4823:   % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
                   4824:   % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
                   4825:   % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
                   4826:   % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
                   4827:   % sorted result.
                   4828:   \edef\temp{%
                   4829:     \write\writeto{%
                   4830:       \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
                   4831:   }%
                   4832:   \temp
                   4833: }
                   4834: 
                   4835: % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
                   4836: %
                   4837: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
                   4838: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
                   4839: % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
                   4840: % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that
                   4841: % sequences like this:
                   4842: % @end defun
                   4843: % @tindex whatever
                   4844: % @defun ...
                   4845: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
                   4846: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
                   4847: % the previous defun.
                   4848: %
                   4849: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
                   4850: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
                   4851: %
                   4852: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
                   4853: %
                   4854: % But wait, there is a catch there:
                   4855: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
                   4856: % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
                   4857: % of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
                   4858: % representation of the skip.
                   4859: %
                   4860: % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
                   4861: % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
                   4862: %
                   4863: \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
                   4864: %
                   4865: \newskip\whatsitskip
                   4866: \newcount\whatsitpenalty
                   4867: %
                   4868: % ..., ready, GO:
                   4869: %
                   4870: \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
                   4871:   #1%
                   4872:  \else
                   4873:   % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
                   4874:   \whatsitskip = \lastskip
                   4875:   \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
                   4876:   \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
                   4877:   %
                   4878:   % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
                   4879:   % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
                   4880:   % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
                   4881:   % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
                   4882:   % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
                   4883:   \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
                   4884:   \else
                   4885:     \vskip-\whatsitskip
                   4886:   \fi
                   4887:   %
                   4888:   #1%
                   4889:   %
                   4890:   \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
                   4891:     % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
                   4892:     % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
                   4893:     % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
                   4894:     % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
                   4895:     % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
                   4896:     %   @deffn deffn-whatever
                   4897:     %   @vindex index-whatever
                   4898:     %   Description.
                   4899:     % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
                   4900:     % and the "Description." paragraph.
                   4901:     \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
                   4902:   \else
                   4903:     % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
                   4904:     % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
                   4905:     % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
                   4906:     \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
                   4907:   \fi
                   4908: \fi}
                   4909: 
                   4910: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
                   4911: %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
                   4912: % or
                   4913: %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
                   4914: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
                   4915: % containing these kinds of lines:
                   4916: %  \initial {c}
                   4917: %     before the first topic whose initial is c
                   4918: %  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
                   4919: %     for a topic that is used without subtopics
                   4920: %  \primary {topic}
                   4921: %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
                   4922: %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
                   4923: %     for each subtopic.
                   4924: 
                   4925: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
                   4926: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
                   4927: 
                   4928: \def\findex {\fnindex}
                   4929: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
                   4930: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
                   4931: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
                   4932: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
                   4933: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
                   4934: 
                   4935: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
                   4936: {\obeylines %
                   4937: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
                   4938: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
                   4939: 
                   4940: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
                   4941: 
                   4942: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
                   4943: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
                   4944: %
                   4945: \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
                   4946:   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
                   4947:   %
                   4948:   \smallfonts \rm
                   4949:   \tolerance = 9500
                   4950:   \plainfrenchspacing
                   4951:   \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
                   4952:   %
                   4953:   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
                   4954:   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
                   4955:   % \initial {@}
                   4956:   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
                   4957:   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
                   4958:   \catcode`\@ = 11
                   4959:   \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
                   4960:   \ifeof 1
                   4961:     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
                   4962:     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
                   4963:     % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
                   4964:     % there is some text.
                   4965:     \putwordIndexNonexistent
                   4966:   \else
                   4967:     %
                   4968:     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
                   4969:     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
                   4970:     % it can discover if there is anything in it.
                   4971:     \read 1 to \temp
                   4972:     \ifeof 1
                   4973:       \putwordIndexIsEmpty
                   4974:     \else
                   4975:       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
                   4976:       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
                   4977:       % to make right now.
                   4978:       \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
                   4979:       \catcode`\\ = 0
                   4980:       \escapechar = `\\
                   4981:       \begindoublecolumns
                   4982:       \input \jobname.#1s
                   4983:       \enddoublecolumns
                   4984:     \fi
                   4985:   \fi
                   4986:   \closein 1
                   4987: \endgroup}
                   4988: 
                   4989: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
                   4990: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
                   4991: 
                   4992: \def\initial#1{{%
                   4993:   % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
                   4994:   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
                   4995:   %
                   4996:   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
                   4997:   \removelastskip
                   4998:   %
                   4999:   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
                   5000:   \nobreak
                   5001:   \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
                   5002:   \penalty 0
                   5003:   \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
                   5004:   %
                   5005:   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
                   5006:   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
                   5007:   % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
                   5008:   % we need before each entry, but it's better.
                   5009:   %
                   5010:   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
                   5011:   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
                   5012:   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
                   5013:   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
                   5014:   \nobreak
                   5015:   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
                   5016: }}
                   5017: 
                   5018: % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
                   5019: % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
                   5020: % and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
                   5021: %
                   5022: % A straightforward implementation would start like this:
                   5023: %      \def\entry#1#2{...
                   5024: % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
                   5025: % @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
                   5026: % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
                   5027: % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
                   5028: %                                 --kasal, 21nov03
                   5029: \def\entry{%
                   5030:   \begingroup
                   5031:     %
                   5032:     % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
                   5033:     % affect previous text.
                   5034:     \par
                   5035:     %
                   5036:     % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
                   5037:     \parfillskip = 0in
                   5038:     %
                   5039:     % No extra space above this paragraph.
                   5040:     \parskip = 0in
                   5041:     %
                   5042:     % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
                   5043:     \finalhyphendemerits = 0
                   5044:     %
                   5045:     % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
                   5046:     % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
                   5047:     % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
                   5048:     % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
                   5049:     % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
                   5050:     %
                   5051:     % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
                   5052:     % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
                   5053:     \hangindent = 2em
                   5054:     %
                   5055:     % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
                   5056:     % with blank space.
                   5057:     \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
                   5058:     %
                   5059:     % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
                   5060:     % columns.
                   5061:     \vskip 0pt plus1pt
                   5062:     %
                   5063:     % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
                   5064:     % from @* into spaces.  The user might give these in long section
                   5065:     % titles, for instance.
                   5066:     \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
                   5067:     \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
                   5068:     %
                   5069:     % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
                   5070:     \afterassignment\doentry
                   5071:     \let\temp =
                   5072: }
                   5073: \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
                   5074: \def\doentry{%
                   5075:     \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
                   5076:       \noindent
                   5077:       \aftergroup\finishentry
                   5078:       % And now comes the text of the entry.
                   5079: }
                   5080: \def\finishentry#1{%
                   5081:     % #1 is the page number.
                   5082:     %
                   5083:     % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
                   5084:     % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
                   5085:     % cursed by a Unix daemon.
                   5086:     \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
                   5087:     \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
                   5088:       \ %
                   5089:     \else
                   5090:       %
                   5091:       % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
                   5092:       % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
                   5093:       % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
                   5094:       \hfil\penalty50
                   5095:       \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
                   5096:       %
                   5097:       % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
                   5098:       % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
                   5099:       % \hbox ensues.
                   5100:       \ifpdf
                   5101:        \pdfgettoks#1.%
                   5102:        \ \the\toksA
                   5103:       \else
                   5104:        \ #1%
                   5105:       \fi
                   5106:     \fi
                   5107:     \par
                   5108:   \endgroup
                   5109: }
                   5110: 
                   5111: % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
                   5112: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
                   5113:   \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
                   5114: 
                   5115: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
                   5116: 
                   5117: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
                   5118: \def\secondary#1#2{{%
                   5119:   \parfillskip=0in
                   5120:   \parskip=0in
                   5121:   \hangindent=1in
                   5122:   \hangafter=1
                   5123:   \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
                   5124:   \ifpdf
                   5125:     \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
                   5126:   \else
                   5127:     #2
                   5128:   \fi
                   5129:   \par
                   5130: }}
                   5131: 
                   5132: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
                   5133: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
                   5134: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
                   5135: \catcode`\@=11
                   5136: 
                   5137: \newbox\partialpage
                   5138: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
                   5139: 
                   5140: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
                   5141:   % Grab any single-column material above us.
                   5142:   \output = {%
                   5143:     %
                   5144:     % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
                   5145:     % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
                   5146:     % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
                   5147:     % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
                   5148:     % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
                   5149:     % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
                   5150:     % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
                   5151:     \ifvoid\partialpage \else
                   5152:       \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
                   5153:     \fi
                   5154:     %
                   5155:     \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
                   5156:       % Unvbox the main output page.
                   5157:       \unvbox\PAGE
                   5158:       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
                   5159:     }%
                   5160:   }%
                   5161:   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
                   5162:   %
                   5163:   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
                   5164:   \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
                   5165:   %
                   5166:   % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
                   5167:   % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
                   5168:   % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
                   5169:   % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
                   5170:   % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
                   5171:   %
                   5172:   % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
                   5173:   % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
                   5174:   % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
                   5175:   % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
                   5176:   % as it did when we hard-coded it.
                   5177:   %
                   5178:   % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
                   5179:   % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
                   5180:   % been clobbered.
                   5181:   %
                   5182:   \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
                   5183:     \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
                   5184:     \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
                   5185:   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
                   5186:   %
                   5187:   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
                   5188:   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
                   5189:   \vsize = 2\vsize
                   5190: }
                   5191: 
                   5192: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
                   5193: % the last.
                   5194: %
                   5195: \def\doublecolumnout{%
                   5196:   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
                   5197:   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
                   5198:   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
                   5199:   % previous page.
                   5200:   \dimen@ = \vsize
                   5201:   \divide\dimen@ by 2
                   5202:   \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
                   5203:   %
                   5204:   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
                   5205:   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
                   5206:   \onepageout\pagesofar
                   5207:   \unvbox255
                   5208:   \penalty\outputpenalty
                   5209: }
                   5210: %
                   5211: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
                   5212: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
                   5213: \def\pagesofar{%
                   5214:   \unvbox\partialpage
                   5215:   %
                   5216:   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
                   5217:   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
                   5218:   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
                   5219: }
                   5220: %
                   5221: % All done with double columns.
                   5222: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
                   5223:   % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
                   5224:   % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
                   5225:   % following situation:
                   5226:   %
                   5227:   % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
                   5228:   % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
                   5229:   % break occurs before the last section starts.  However, the last
                   5230:   % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
                   5231:   % fit on the page and has to be broken off.  Without the following
                   5232:   % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
                   5233:   % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
                   5234:   % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
                   5235:   % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
                   5236:   % is wrong:  The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
                   5237:   % the broken-off section in the recent contributions.  As soon as
                   5238:   % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
                   5239:   % break.  The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
                   5240:   % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
                   5241:   % goal.  When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
                   5242:   % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
                   5243:   % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
                   5244:   % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
                   5245:   % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
                   5246:   %
                   5247:   % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
                   5248:   % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
                   5249:   \penalty0
                   5250:   %
                   5251:   \output = {%
                   5252:     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
                   5253:     % current page, no automatic page break.
                   5254:     \balancecolumns
                   5255:     %
                   5256:     % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
                   5257:     % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
                   5258:     % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
                   5259:     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
                   5260:     % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
                   5261:     % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
                   5262:     % the output somewhat more palatable.)
                   5263:     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
                   5264:   }%
                   5265:   \eject
                   5266:   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
                   5267:   %
                   5268:   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
                   5269:   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
                   5270:   % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
                   5271:   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
                   5272:   \pagegoal = \vsize
                   5273: }
                   5274: %
                   5275: % Called at the end of the double column material.
                   5276: \def\balancecolumns{%
                   5277:   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
                   5278:   \dimen@ = \ht0
                   5279:   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
                   5280:   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
                   5281:   \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
                   5282:   %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
                   5283:   \splittopskip = \topskip
                   5284:   % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
                   5285:   {%
                   5286:     \vbadness = 10000
                   5287:     \loop
                   5288:       \global\setbox3 = \copy0
                   5289:       \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
                   5290:     \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
                   5291:       \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
                   5292:     \repeat
                   5293:   }%
                   5294:   %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
                   5295:   \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
                   5296:   \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
                   5297:   %
                   5298:   \pagesofar
                   5299: }
                   5300: \catcode`\@ = \other
                   5301: 
                   5302: 
                   5303: \message{sectioning,}
                   5304: % Chapters, sections, etc.
                   5305: 
                   5306: % Let's start with @part.
                   5307: \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
                   5308: \def\partzzz#1{%
                   5309:   \chapoddpage
                   5310:   \null
                   5311:   \vskip.3\vsize  % move it down on the page a bit
                   5312:   \begingroup
                   5313:     \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
                   5314:     \let\lastnode=\empty      % no node to associate with
                   5315:     \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
                   5316:     \headingsoff              % no headline or footline on the part page
                   5317:     \chapoddpage
                   5318:   \endgroup
                   5319: }
                   5320: 
                   5321: % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron.  But we count the unnumbered
                   5322: % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
                   5323: % outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
                   5324: % numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
                   5325: % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
                   5326: \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
                   5327: \newcount\chapno
                   5328: \newcount\secno        \secno=0
                   5329: \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
                   5330: \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
                   5331: 
                   5332: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
                   5333: \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
                   5334: %
                   5335: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
                   5336: % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
                   5337: % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
                   5338: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
                   5339: %
                   5340: \def\appendixletter{%
                   5341:   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
                   5342:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
                   5343:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
                   5344:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
                   5345:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
                   5346:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
                   5347:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
                   5348:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
                   5349:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
                   5350:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
                   5351:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
                   5352:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
                   5353:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
                   5354:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
                   5355:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
                   5356:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
                   5357:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
                   5358:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
                   5359:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
                   5360:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
                   5361:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
                   5362:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
                   5363:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
                   5364:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
                   5365:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
                   5366:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
                   5367:   % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
                   5368:   % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
                   5369:   % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
                   5370:   % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
                   5371:   \else\char\the\appendixno
                   5372:   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
                   5373:   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
                   5374: 
                   5375: % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
                   5376: % and name of the chapter.  Page headings and footings can use
                   5377: % these.  @section does likewise.
                   5378: \def\thischapter{}
                   5379: \def\thischapternum{}
                   5380: \def\thischaptername{}
                   5381: \def\thissection{}
                   5382: \def\thissectionnum{}
                   5383: \def\thissectionname{}
                   5384: 
                   5385: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
                   5386: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
                   5387: 
                   5388: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
                   5389: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
                   5390: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
                   5391: 
                   5392: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
                   5393: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
                   5394: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
                   5395: 
                   5396: % we only have subsub.
                   5397: \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
                   5398: %
                   5399: % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
                   5400: % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
                   5401: \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
                   5402: %
                   5403: % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
                   5404: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
                   5405: \def\chapheadtype{N}
                   5406: 
                   5407: % Choose a heading macro
                   5408: % #1 is heading type
                   5409: % #2 is heading level
                   5410: % #3 is text for heading
                   5411: \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
                   5412:   % Compute the abs. sec. level:
                   5413:   \absseclevel=#2
                   5414:   \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
                   5415:   % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
                   5416:   \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
                   5417:     \absseclevel = 0
                   5418:   \else
                   5419:     \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
                   5420:       \absseclevel = 3
                   5421:     \fi
                   5422:   \fi
                   5423:   % The heading type:
                   5424:   \def\headtype{#1}%
                   5425:   \if \headtype U%
                   5426:     \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
                   5427:       \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
                   5428:     \fi
                   5429:   \else
                   5430:     % Check for appendix sections:
                   5431:     \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
                   5432:       \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
                   5433:     \else
                   5434:       \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
                   5435:        \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
                   5436:       \fi\fi
                   5437:     \fi
                   5438:     % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
                   5439:     \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
                   5440:       \def\headtype{U}%
                   5441:     \else
                   5442:       \chardef\unnlevel = 3
                   5443:     \fi
                   5444:   \fi
                   5445:   % Now print the heading:
                   5446:   \if \headtype U%
                   5447:     \ifcase\absseclevel
                   5448:        \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
                   5449:     \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
                   5450:     \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
                   5451:     \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
                   5452:     \fi
                   5453:   \else
                   5454:     \if \headtype A%
                   5455:       \ifcase\absseclevel
                   5456:          \appendixzzz{#3}%
                   5457:       \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
                   5458:       \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
                   5459:       \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
                   5460:       \fi
                   5461:     \else
                   5462:       \ifcase\absseclevel
                   5463:          \chapterzzz{#3}%
                   5464:       \or \seczzz{#3}%
                   5465:       \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
                   5466:       \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
                   5467:       \fi
                   5468:     \fi
                   5469:   \fi
                   5470:   \suppressfirstparagraphindent
                   5471: }
                   5472: 
                   5473: % an interface:
                   5474: \def\numhead{\genhead N}
                   5475: \def\apphead{\genhead A}
                   5476: \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
                   5477: 
                   5478: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
                   5479: % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
                   5480: %
                   5481: % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
                   5482: % (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
                   5483: \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
                   5484: %
                   5485: \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
                   5486: \def\chapterzzz#1{%
                   5487:   % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
                   5488:   % as an @include file.
                   5489:   \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
                   5490:     \global\advance\chapno by 1
                   5491:   %
                   5492:   % Used for \float.
                   5493:   \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
                   5494:   \resetallfloatnos
                   5495:   %
                   5496:   % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
                   5497:   \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
                   5498:   \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
                   5499:   %
                   5500:   % Write the actual heading.
                   5501:   \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
                   5502:   %
                   5503:   % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
                   5504:   \global\let\section = \numberedsec
                   5505:   \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
                   5506:   \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
                   5507: }
                   5508: 
                   5509: \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
                   5510: %
                   5511: \def\appendixzzz#1{%
                   5512:   \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
                   5513:     \global\advance\appendixno by 1
                   5514:   \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
                   5515:   \resetallfloatnos
                   5516:   %
                   5517:   % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
                   5518:   \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
                   5519:   \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
                   5520:   %
                   5521:   \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
                   5522:   %
                   5523:   \global\let\section = \appendixsec
                   5524:   \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
                   5525:   \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
                   5526: }
                   5527: 
                   5528: % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
                   5529: \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
                   5530: \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
                   5531:   \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
                   5532:     \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
                   5533:   %
                   5534:   % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
                   5535:   \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
                   5536:   \resetallfloatnos
                   5537:   %
                   5538:   % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
                   5539:   % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
                   5540:   % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
                   5541:   % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
                   5542:   % to be executed, not expanded).
                   5543:   %
                   5544:   % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
                   5545:   % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
                   5546:   % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
                   5547:   % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
                   5548:   % the toc entries.)
                   5549:   \toks0 = {#1}%
                   5550:   \message{(\the\toks0)}%
                   5551:   %
                   5552:   \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
                   5553:   %
                   5554:   \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
                   5555:   \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
                   5556:   \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
                   5557: }
                   5558: 
                   5559: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
                   5560: \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
                   5561:   % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
                   5562:   % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
                   5563:   % Thus we are safer this way:                --kasal, 24feb04
                   5564:   \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
                   5565:   \unnmhead0{#1}%
                   5566:   \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
                   5567: }
                   5568: 
                   5569: % @top is like @unnumbered.
                   5570: \let\top\unnumbered
                   5571: 
                   5572: % Sections.
                   5573: % 
                   5574: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
                   5575: \def\seczzz#1{%
                   5576:   \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
                   5577:   \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
                   5578: }
                   5579: 
                   5580: % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
                   5581: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
                   5582: \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
                   5583:   \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
                   5584:   \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
                   5585: }
                   5586: \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
                   5587: 
                   5588: % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
                   5589: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
                   5590: \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
                   5591:   \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
                   5592:   \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
                   5593: }
                   5594: 
                   5595: % Subsections.
                   5596: % 
                   5597: % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
                   5598: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
                   5599: \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
                   5600:   \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
                   5601:   \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
                   5602: }
                   5603: 
                   5604: % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
                   5605: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
                   5606: \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
                   5607:   \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
                   5608:   \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
                   5609:                  {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
                   5610: }
                   5611: 
                   5612: % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
                   5613: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
                   5614: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
                   5615:   \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
                   5616:   \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
                   5617:                  {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
                   5618: }
                   5619: 
                   5620: % Subsubsections.
                   5621: % 
                   5622: % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
                   5623: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
                   5624: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
                   5625:   \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
                   5626:   \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
                   5627:                  {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
                   5628: }
                   5629: 
                   5630: % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
                   5631: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
                   5632: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
                   5633:   \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
                   5634:   \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
                   5635:                  {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
                   5636: }
                   5637: 
                   5638: % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
                   5639: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
                   5640: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
                   5641:   \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
                   5642:   \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
                   5643:                  {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
                   5644: }
                   5645: 
                   5646: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
                   5647: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
                   5648: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
                   5649: \let\section = \numberedsec
                   5650: \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
                   5651: \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
                   5652: 
                   5653: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
                   5654: 
                   5655: \def\majorheading{%
                   5656:   {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
                   5657:   \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
                   5658: }
                   5659: 
                   5660: \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
                   5661: \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
                   5662:   \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
                   5663:   \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
                   5664:   \suppressfirstparagraphindent
                   5665: }
                   5666: 
                   5667: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
                   5668: \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
                   5669:   \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
                   5670: \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
                   5671:   \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
                   5672: \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
                   5673:   \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
                   5674: 
                   5675: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
                   5676: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
                   5677: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
                   5678: 
                   5679: % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
                   5680: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
                   5681: 
                   5682: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
                   5683: \newskip\chapheadingskip
                   5684: 
                   5685: % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
                   5686: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
                   5687: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
                   5688: % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
                   5689: % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong.  But we don't
                   5690: % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
                   5691: \def\chapoddpage{%
                   5692:   \chappager
                   5693:   \ifodd\pageno \else
                   5694:     \begingroup
                   5695:       \headingsoff
                   5696:       \null
                   5697:       \chappager
                   5698:     \endgroup
                   5699:   \fi
                   5700: }
                   5701: 
                   5702: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
                   5703: 
                   5704: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
                   5705: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   5706: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
                   5707: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
                   5708: 
                   5709: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
                   5710: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   5711: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
                   5712: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
                   5713: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
                   5714: 
                   5715: \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
                   5716: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
                   5717: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
                   5718: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
                   5719: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
                   5720: 
                   5721: \CHAPPAGon
                   5722: 
                   5723: % Chapter opening.
                   5724: %
                   5725: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
                   5726: % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
                   5727: %
                   5728: % To test against our argument.
                   5729: \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
                   5730: \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
                   5731: \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
                   5732: %
                   5733: \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
                   5734:   % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
                   5735:   \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
                   5736:   \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
                   5737:   \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
                   5738:                         \gdef\thissection{}}%
                   5739:   %
                   5740:   \def\temptype{#2}%
                   5741:   \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
                   5742:     \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
                   5743:                           \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
                   5744:   \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
                   5745:     \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
                   5746:                           \gdef\thischapter{}}%
                   5747:   \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
                   5748:     \toks0={#1}%
                   5749:     \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
                   5750:       \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
                   5751:       \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
                   5752:       % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
                   5753:       % commands in some of the translations.
                   5754:       \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
                   5755:                                  \noexpand\thischapternum:
                   5756:                                  \noexpand\thischaptername}%
                   5757:     }%
                   5758:   \else
                   5759:     \toks0={#1}%
                   5760:     \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
                   5761:       \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
                   5762:       \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
                   5763:       % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
                   5764:       % commands in some of the translations.
                   5765:       \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
                   5766:                                  \noexpand\thischapternum:
                   5767:                                  \noexpand\thischaptername}%
                   5768:     }%
                   5769:   \fi\fi\fi
                   5770:   %
                   5771:   % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
                   5772:   % the preceding space.
                   5773:   \safewhatsit\domark
                   5774:   %
                   5775:   % Insert the chapter heading break.
                   5776:   \pchapsepmacro
                   5777:   %
                   5778:   % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
                   5779:   % between here and the heading.
                   5780:   \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
                   5781:   \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
                   5782:   \domark
                   5783:   %
                   5784:   {%
                   5785:     \chapfonts \rmisbold
                   5786:     %
                   5787:     % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
                   5788:     % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
                   5789:     % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
                   5790:     \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
                   5791:     %
                   5792:     % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
                   5793:     % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
                   5794:     \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
                   5795:       \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
                   5796:       \def\toctype{unnchap}%
                   5797:     \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
                   5798:       \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
                   5799:       \def\toctype{omit}%
                   5800:     \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
                   5801:       \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
                   5802:       \def\toctype{app}%
                   5803:     \else
                   5804:       \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
                   5805:       \def\toctype{numchap}%
                   5806:     \fi\fi\fi
                   5807:     %
                   5808:     % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
                   5809:     % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
                   5810:     % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
                   5811:     \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
                   5812:     %
                   5813:     % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
                   5814:     % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
                   5815:     % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
                   5816:     % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
                   5817:     % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
                   5818:     \donoderef{#2}%
                   5819:     %
                   5820:     % Typeset the actual heading.
                   5821:     \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
                   5822:     \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
                   5823:           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
                   5824:   }%
                   5825:   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
                   5826:   \nobreak
                   5827: }
                   5828: 
                   5829: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
                   5830: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
                   5831: \def\centerparameters{%
                   5832:   \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
                   5833:   \leftskip = \rightskip
                   5834:   \parfillskip = 0pt
                   5835: }
                   5836: 
                   5837: 
                   5838: % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
                   5839: % updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
                   5840: %
                   5841: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
                   5842: %
                   5843: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
                   5844:   \chapoddpage
                   5845:   \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
                   5846:   \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
                   5847: }
                   5848: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
                   5849: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
                   5850: \par\penalty 5000 %
                   5851: }
                   5852: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
                   5853:   \chapoddpage
                   5854:   \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
                   5855:   \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
                   5856: }
                   5857: \def\CHAPFopen{%
                   5858:   \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
                   5859:   \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
                   5860: 
                   5861: 
                   5862: % Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
                   5863: % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
                   5864: %
                   5865: \newskip\secheadingskip
                   5866: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
                   5867: 
                   5868: % Subsection titles.
                   5869: \newskip\subsecheadingskip
                   5870: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
                   5871: 
                   5872: % Subsubsection titles.
                   5873: \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
                   5874: \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
                   5875: 
                   5876: 
                   5877: % Print any size, any type, section title.
                   5878: %
                   5879: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
                   5880: % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
                   5881: % section number.
                   5882: %
                   5883: \def\seckeyword{sec}
                   5884: %
                   5885: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
                   5886:   {%
                   5887:     \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
                   5888:     %
                   5889:     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
                   5890:     \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
                   5891:     %
                   5892:     \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
                   5893:     \def\temptype{#3}%
                   5894:     %
                   5895:     % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
                   5896:     \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
                   5897:     \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
                   5898:       \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
                   5899:         \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
                   5900:                               \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
                   5901:       \fi
                   5902:     \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
                   5903:       % Don't redefine \thissection.
                   5904:     \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
                   5905:       \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
                   5906:         \toks0={#1}%
                   5907:         \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
                   5908:           \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
                   5909:           \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
                   5910:           % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
                   5911:           % commands in some of the translations.
                   5912:           \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
                   5913:                                      \noexpand\thissectionnum:
                   5914:                                      \noexpand\thissectionname}%
                   5915:         }%
                   5916:       \fi
                   5917:     \else
                   5918:       \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
                   5919:         \toks0={#1}%
                   5920:         \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
                   5921:           \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
                   5922:           \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
                   5923:           % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
                   5924:           % commands in some of the translations.
                   5925:           \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
                   5926:                                      \noexpand\thissectionnum:
                   5927:                                      \noexpand\thissectionname}%
                   5928:         }%
                   5929:       \fi
                   5930:     \fi\fi\fi
                   5931:     %
                   5932:     % Go into vertical mode.  Usually we'll already be there, but we
                   5933:     % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
                   5934:     % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
                   5935:     \par
                   5936:     %
                   5937:     % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
                   5938:     % the preceding space.
                   5939:     \safewhatsit\domark
                   5940:     %
                   5941:     % Insert space above the heading.
                   5942:     \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
                   5943:     %
                   5944:     % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
                   5945:     % between here and the heading.
                   5946:     \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
                   5947:     \domark
                   5948:     %
                   5949:     % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
                   5950:     \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
                   5951:       \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
                   5952:       \def\toctype{unn}%
                   5953:       \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
                   5954:     \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
                   5955:       % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
                   5956:       % and don't redefine \lastsection.
                   5957:       \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
                   5958:       \def\toctype{omit}%
                   5959:       \let\sectionlevel=\empty
                   5960:     \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
                   5961:       \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
                   5962:       \def\toctype{app}%
                   5963:       \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
                   5964:     \else
                   5965:       \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
                   5966:       \def\toctype{num}%
                   5967:       \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
                   5968:     \fi\fi\fi
                   5969:     %
                   5970:     % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
                   5971:     \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
                   5972:     %
                   5973:     % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
                   5974:     % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
                   5975:     \donoderef{#3}%
                   5976:     %
                   5977:     % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
                   5978:     % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
                   5979:     % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
                   5980:     % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
                   5981:     % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
                   5982:     % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
                   5983:     \nobreak
                   5984:     %
                   5985:     % Output the actual section heading.
                   5986:     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
                   5987:           \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
                   5988:           \unhbox0 #1}%
                   5989:   }%
                   5990:   % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
                   5991:   % Don't allow stretch, though.
                   5992:   \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
                   5993:   %
                   5994:   % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
                   5995:   % was followed by glue.
                   5996:   \nobreak
                   5997:   %
                   5998:   % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
                   5999:   % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
                   6000:   % discardable item.)  However, when a paragraph is not started next
                   6001:   % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
                   6002:   % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
                   6003:   % obscuring the section heading with something else.
                   6004:   \vskip-\parskip
                   6005:   %
                   6006:   % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
                   6007:   % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
                   6008:   % and do the needful.
                   6009:   \penalty 10001
                   6010: }
                   6011: 
                   6012: 
                   6013: \message{toc,}
                   6014: % Table of contents.
                   6015: \newwrite\tocfile
                   6016: 
                   6017: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
                   6018: % Called from @chapter, etc.
                   6019: %
                   6020: % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
                   6021: % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
                   6022: % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
                   6023: % read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
                   6024: % destination to jump to.
                   6025: %
                   6026: % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
                   6027: % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
                   6028: % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
                   6029: % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
                   6030: %
                   6031: \newif\iftocfileopened
                   6032: \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
                   6033: %
                   6034: \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
                   6035:   \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
                   6036:   \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
                   6037:     \iftocfileopened\else
                   6038:       \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
                   6039:       \global\tocfileopenedtrue
                   6040:     \fi
                   6041:     %
                   6042:     \iflinks
                   6043:       {\atdummies
                   6044:        \edef\temp{%
                   6045:          \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
                   6046:        \temp
                   6047:       }%
                   6048:     \fi
                   6049:   \fi
                   6050:   %
                   6051:   % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
                   6052:   % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
                   6053:   % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
                   6054:   % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
                   6055:   % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
                   6056:   % `1', and two named `2'.
                   6057:   \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
                   6058: }
                   6059: 
                   6060: 
                   6061: % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
                   6062: % fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
                   6063: % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
                   6064: %
                   6065: \def\activecatcodes{%
                   6066:   \catcode`\"=\active
                   6067:   \catcode`\$=\active
                   6068:   \catcode`\<=\active
                   6069:   \catcode`\>=\active
                   6070:   \catcode`\\=\active
                   6071:   \catcode`\^=\active
                   6072:   \catcode`\_=\active
                   6073:   \catcode`\|=\active
                   6074:   \catcode`\~=\active
                   6075: }
                   6076: 
                   6077: 
                   6078: % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
                   6079: \def\readtocfile{%
                   6080:   \setupdatafile
                   6081:   \activecatcodes
                   6082:   \input \tocreadfilename
                   6083: }
                   6084: 
                   6085: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
                   6086: \newcount\savepageno
                   6087: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
                   6088: 
                   6089: % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
                   6090: %
                   6091: \def\startcontents#1{%
                   6092:   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
                   6093:   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
                   6094:   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
                   6095:   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
                   6096:   \contentsalignmacro
                   6097:   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
                   6098:   %
                   6099:   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
                   6100:   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
                   6101:   \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
                   6102:   %
                   6103:   \savepageno = \pageno
                   6104:   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
                   6105:     \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
                   6106:     \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
                   6107:     %
                   6108:     % Roman numerals for page numbers.
                   6109:     \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
                   6110: }
                   6111: 
                   6112: % redefined for the two-volume lispref.  We always output on
                   6113: % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
                   6114: %
                   6115: \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
                   6116: 
                   6117: % Normal (long) toc.
                   6118: %
                   6119: \def\contents{%
                   6120:   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
                   6121:     \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
                   6122:     \ifeof 1 \else
                   6123:       \readtocfile
                   6124:     \fi
                   6125:     \vfill \eject
                   6126:     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
                   6127:     \ifeof 1 \else
                   6128:       \pdfmakeoutlines
                   6129:     \fi
                   6130:     \closein 1
                   6131:   \endgroup
                   6132:   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
                   6133:   \global\pageno = \savepageno
                   6134: }
                   6135: 
                   6136: % And just the chapters.
                   6137: \def\summarycontents{%
                   6138:   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
                   6139:     %
                   6140:     \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
                   6141:     \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
                   6142:     \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
                   6143:     \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
                   6144:     % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
                   6145:     \secfonts
                   6146:     \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
                   6147:     \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
                   6148:     \rm
                   6149:     \hyphenpenalty = 10000
                   6150:     \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
                   6151:     \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
                   6152:     \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6153:     \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6154:     \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6155:     \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6156:     \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6157:     \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6158:     \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6159:     \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
                   6160:     \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
                   6161:     \ifeof 1 \else
                   6162:       \readtocfile
                   6163:     \fi
                   6164:     \closein 1
                   6165:     \vfill \eject
                   6166:     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
                   6167:   \endgroup
                   6168:   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
                   6169:   \global\pageno = \savepageno
                   6170: }
                   6171: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
                   6172: 
                   6173: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
                   6174: % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
                   6175: %
                   6176: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
                   6177:   % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
                   6178:   % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
                   6179:   % But use \hss just in case.
                   6180:   % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
                   6181:   % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
                   6182:   %
                   6183:   % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
                   6184:   % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
                   6185:   % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
                   6186:   % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
                   6187:   % there are before deciding ...
                   6188:   \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
                   6189: }
                   6190: 
                   6191: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
                   6192: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
                   6193: % The last argument is the page number.
                   6194: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
                   6195: 
                   6196: % Parts, in the main contents.  Replace the part number, which doesn't
                   6197: % exist, with an empty box.  Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
                   6198: % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
                   6199: \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
                   6200: \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
                   6201: %
                   6202: % Parts, in the short toc.
                   6203: \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
                   6204:   \penalty-300
                   6205:   \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
                   6206:   \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
                   6207: }
                   6208: 
                   6209: % Chapters, in the main contents.
                   6210: \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
                   6211: %
                   6212: % Chapters, in the short toc.
                   6213: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
                   6214: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
                   6215:   \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
                   6216: }
                   6217: 
                   6218: % Appendices, in the main contents.
                   6219: % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
                   6220: %
                   6221: \def\appendixbox#1{%
                   6222:   % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
                   6223:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
                   6224:   \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
                   6225: %
                   6226: \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
                   6227: 
                   6228: % Unnumbered chapters.
                   6229: \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
                   6230: \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
                   6231: 
                   6232: % Sections.
                   6233: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
                   6234: \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
                   6235: \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
                   6236: 
                   6237: % Subsections.
                   6238: \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
                   6239: \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
                   6240: \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
                   6241: 
                   6242: % And subsubsections.
                   6243: \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
                   6244: \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
                   6245: \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
                   6246: 
                   6247: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
                   6248: % Same as \defaultparindent.
                   6249: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
                   6250: 
                   6251: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
                   6252: % page number.
                   6253: %
                   6254: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
                   6255: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
                   6256: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
                   6257:    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
                   6258:    \begingroup
                   6259:      \chapentryfonts
                   6260:      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   6261:    \endgroup
                   6262:    \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
                   6263: }
                   6264: 
                   6265: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
                   6266:   \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
                   6267:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   6268: \endgroup}
                   6269: 
                   6270: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
                   6271:   \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
                   6272:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   6273: \endgroup}
                   6274: 
                   6275: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
                   6276:   \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
                   6277:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   6278: \endgroup}
                   6279: 
                   6280: % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
                   6281: \let\tocentry = \entry
                   6282: 
                   6283: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
                   6284: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
                   6285: 
                   6286: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
                   6287: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
                   6288: 
                   6289: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
                   6290: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
                   6291: \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
                   6292: \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
                   6293: 
                   6294: 
                   6295: \message{environments,}
                   6296: % @foo ... @end foo.
                   6297: 
                   6298: % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
                   6299: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
                   6300: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
                   6301: 
                   6302: \envdef\tex{%
                   6303:   \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
                   6304:   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
                   6305:   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
                   6306:   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
                   6307:   \catcode `\%=14
                   6308:   \catcode `\+=\other
                   6309:   \catcode `\"=\other
                   6310:   \catcode `\|=\other
                   6311:   \catcode `\<=\other
                   6312:   \catcode `\>=\other
                   6313:   \catcode `\`=\other
                   6314:   \catcode `\'=\other
                   6315:   \escapechar=`\\
                   6316:   %
                   6317:   % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000).  So reset it, and all our
                   6318:   % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
                   6319:   \mathactive
                   6320:   %
                   6321:   \let\b=\ptexb
                   6322:   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
                   6323:   \let\c=\ptexc
                   6324:   \let\,=\ptexcomma
                   6325:   \let\.=\ptexdot
                   6326:   \let\dots=\ptexdots
                   6327:   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
                   6328:   \let\!=\ptexexclam
                   6329:   \let\i=\ptexi
                   6330:   \let\indent=\ptexindent
                   6331:   \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
                   6332:   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
                   6333:   \let\+=\tabalign
                   6334:   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
                   6335:   \let\/=\ptexslash
                   6336:   \let\*=\ptexstar
                   6337:   \let\t=\ptext
                   6338:   \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % we've made it outer
                   6339:   \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
                   6340:   %
                   6341:   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
                   6342:   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
                   6343:   \def\@{@}%
                   6344: }
                   6345: % There is no need to define \Etex.
                   6346: 
                   6347: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
                   6348: % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
                   6349: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
                   6350: 
                   6351: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
                   6352: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
                   6353: 
                   6354: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
                   6355: % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
                   6356: % have any width.
                   6357: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
                   6358: 
                   6359: % This space is always present above and below environments.
                   6360: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
                   6361: 
                   6362: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
                   6363: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
                   6364: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
                   6365: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
                   6366: %
                   6367: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
                   6368:   % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
                   6369:   % \sectionheading, q.v.
                   6370:   \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
                   6371:     \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
                   6372:     \endgraf
                   6373:     \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
                   6374:       \removelastskip
                   6375:       % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
                   6376:       % or better ...
                   6377:       \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
                   6378:       \vskip\envskipamount
                   6379:     \fi
                   6380:   \fi
                   6381: }}
                   6382: 
                   6383: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
                   6384: 
                   6385: % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
                   6386: % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
                   6387: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
                   6388: 
                   6389: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
                   6390: % environment contents.
                   6391: \font\circle=lcircle10
                   6392: \newdimen\circthick
                   6393: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
                   6394: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
                   6395: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
                   6396: %
                   6397: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
                   6398: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
                   6399: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
                   6400: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
                   6401: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
                   6402:         \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
                   6403:         \hskip\rskip}}
                   6404: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
                   6405:         \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
                   6406:         \hskip\rskip}}
                   6407: %
                   6408: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
                   6409: 
                   6410: \envdef\cartouche{%
                   6411:   \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
                   6412:   \startsavinginserts
                   6413:   \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
                   6414:   \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
                   6415:   \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
                   6416:   \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
                   6417:   \cartouter=\hsize
                   6418:   \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
                   6419:                                % side, and for 6pt waste from
                   6420:                                % each corner char, and rule thickness
                   6421:   \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
                   6422:   % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
                   6423:   \let\nonarrowing = t%
                   6424:   %
                   6425:   % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
                   6426:   % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
                   6427:   % collide with the section heading.
                   6428:   \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
                   6429:   %
                   6430:   \vbox\bgroup
                   6431:       \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
                   6432:       \carttop
                   6433:       \hbox\bgroup
                   6434:          \hskip\lskip
                   6435:          \vrule\kern3pt
                   6436:          \vbox\bgroup
                   6437:              \kern3pt
                   6438:              \hsize=\cartinner
                   6439:              \baselineskip=\normbskip
                   6440:              \lineskip=\normlskip
                   6441:              \parskip=\normpskip
                   6442:              \vskip -\parskip
                   6443:              \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
                   6444: }
                   6445: \def\Ecartouche{%
                   6446:               \ifhmode\par\fi
                   6447:              \kern3pt
                   6448:          \egroup
                   6449:          \kern3pt\vrule
                   6450:          \hskip\rskip
                   6451:       \egroup
                   6452:       \cartbot
                   6453:   \egroup
                   6454:   \checkinserts
                   6455: }
                   6456: 
                   6457: 
                   6458: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
                   6459: % inside a group.
                   6460: \newdimen\nonfillparindent
                   6461: \def\nonfillstart{%
                   6462:   \aboveenvbreak
                   6463:   \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
                   6464:   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
                   6465:   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
                   6466:   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
                   6467:   \parskip = 0pt
                   6468:   % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
                   6469:   % the normal \indent.
                   6470:   \nonfillparindent=\parindent
                   6471:   \parindent = 0pt
                   6472:   \let\indent\nonfillindent
                   6473:   %
                   6474:   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
                   6475:   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
                   6476:     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
                   6477:     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
                   6478:   \else
                   6479:     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
                   6480:   \fi
                   6481:   \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
                   6482: }
                   6483: 
                   6484: \begingroup
                   6485: \obeyspaces
                   6486: % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
                   6487: % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
                   6488: % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
                   6489: % @indent.
                   6490: \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
                   6491: \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
                   6492: \ifx\temp %
                   6493: \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
                   6494: \else%
                   6495: \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
                   6496: \fi%
                   6497: }%
                   6498: \endgroup
                   6499: \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
                   6500: \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
                   6501: 
                   6502: % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
                   6503: % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
                   6504: % This affects the following displayed environments:
                   6505: %    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
                   6506: %
                   6507: \def\smallword{small}
                   6508: \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
                   6509: \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
                   6510: \def\setnormaldispenv{%
                   6511:   \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
                   6512:     % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
                   6513:     % line.  This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
                   6514:     % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
                   6515:     % to change the fonts afterward.
                   6516:     \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
                   6517:     \smallexamplefonts \rm
                   6518:   \fi
                   6519: }
                   6520: \def\setsmalldispenv{%
                   6521:   \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
                   6522:   \else
                   6523:     \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
                   6524:     \smallexamplefonts \rm
                   6525:   \fi
                   6526: }
                   6527: 
                   6528: % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
                   6529: % Let's do it in one command.  #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
                   6530: \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
                   6531:   \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
                   6532:   \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
                   6533:   \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
                   6534:   \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
                   6535: }
                   6536: 
                   6537: % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
                   6538: \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
                   6539:   \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
                   6540:   \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
                   6541: }
                   6542: %
                   6543: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
                   6544: % @example: same as @lisp.
                   6545: %
                   6546: % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
                   6547: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
                   6548: %
                   6549: \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
                   6550:   \nonfillstart
                   6551:   \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
                   6552:   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
                   6553:   \gobble % eat return
                   6554: }
                   6555: % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
                   6556: %
                   6557: \makedispenvdef{display}{%
                   6558:   \nonfillstart
                   6559:   \gobble
                   6560: }
                   6561: 
                   6562: % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
                   6563: %
                   6564: \makedispenvdef{format}{%
                   6565:   \let\nonarrowing = t%
                   6566:   \nonfillstart
                   6567:   \gobble
                   6568: }
                   6569: 
                   6570: % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
                   6571: \envdef\flushleft{%
                   6572:   \let\nonarrowing = t%
                   6573:   \nonfillstart
                   6574:   \gobble
                   6575: }
                   6576: \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
                   6577: 
                   6578: % @flushright.
                   6579: %
                   6580: \envdef\flushright{%
                   6581:   \let\nonarrowing = t%
                   6582:   \nonfillstart
                   6583:   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
                   6584:   \gobble
                   6585: }
                   6586: \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
                   6587: 
                   6588: 
                   6589: % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
                   6590: % justification.  From plain.tex.
                   6591: \envdef\raggedright{%
                   6592:   \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
                   6593: }
                   6594: \let\Eraggedright\par
                   6595: 
                   6596: \envdef\raggedleft{%
                   6597:   \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
                   6598:   \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
                   6599:   \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
                   6600:                   % badness reporting.
                   6601: }
                   6602: \let\Eraggedleft\par
                   6603: 
                   6604: \envdef\raggedcenter{%
                   6605:   \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
                   6606:   \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
                   6607:   \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
                   6608:                   % badness reporting.
                   6609: }
                   6610: \let\Eraggedcenter\par
                   6611: 
                   6612: 
                   6613: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
                   6614: % and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
                   6615: % we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
                   6616: % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
                   6617: %
                   6618: \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
                   6619: %
                   6620: \def\quotationstart{%
                   6621:   \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
                   6622:   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
                   6623:     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
                   6624:   \fi
                   6625:   \parsearg\quotationlabel
                   6626: }
                   6627: 
                   6628: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
                   6629: % doing normal filling.
                   6630: %
                   6631: \def\Equotation{%
                   6632:   \par
                   6633:   \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
                   6634:     % indent a bit.
                   6635:     \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
                   6636:   \fi
                   6637:   {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
                   6638: }
                   6639: \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
                   6640: 
                   6641: % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
                   6642: \def\quotationlabel#1{%
                   6643:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   6644:   \ifx\temp\empty \else
                   6645:     {\bf #1: }%
                   6646:   \fi
                   6647: }
                   6648: 
                   6649: % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
                   6650: % has no optional argument.
                   6651: % 
                   6652: \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
                   6653: %
                   6654: \def\indentedblockstart{%
                   6655:   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
                   6656:   \parindent=0pt
                   6657:   %
                   6658:   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
                   6659:   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
                   6660:     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
                   6661:     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
                   6662:   \else
                   6663:     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
                   6664:   \fi
                   6665: }
                   6666: 
                   6667: % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
                   6668: %
                   6669: \def\Eindentedblock{%
                   6670:   \par
                   6671:   {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
                   6672: }
                   6673: \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
                   6674: 
                   6675: 
                   6676: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
                   6677: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
                   6678: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
                   6679: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
                   6680: %
                   6681: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
                   6682: %
                   6683: % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
                   6684: % active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
                   6685: % verbatim line.
                   6686: \def\dospecials{%
                   6687:   \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
                   6688:   \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
                   6689:   \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
                   6690:   % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
                   6691:   % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
                   6692:   % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
                   6693:   %\do\`\do\'%
                   6694: }
                   6695: %
                   6696: % [Knuth] p. 380
                   6697: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
                   6698:   \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
                   6699: %
                   6700: % Setup for the @verb command.
                   6701: %
                   6702: % Eight spaces for a tab
                   6703: \begingroup
                   6704:   \catcode`\^^I=\active
                   6705:   \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
                   6706: \endgroup
                   6707: %
                   6708: \def\setupverb{%
                   6709:   \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
                   6710:   \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
                   6711:   \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
                   6712:   \tabeightspaces
                   6713:   % Respect line breaks,
                   6714:   % print special symbols as themselves, and
                   6715:   % make each space count
                   6716:   % must do in this order:
                   6717:   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
                   6718: }
                   6719: 
                   6720: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
                   6721: %
                   6722: % Real tab expansion.
                   6723: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
                   6724: %
                   6725: % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
                   6726: % tabs.  The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
                   6727: % or some other command that starts with a begin-group.  Otherwise, the
                   6728: % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
                   6729: % it is typeset.  Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
                   6730: % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
                   6731: \newbox\verbbox
                   6732: \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
                   6733: %
                   6734: \begingroup
                   6735:   \catcode`\^^I=\active
                   6736:   \gdef\tabexpand{%
                   6737:     \catcode`\^^I=\active
                   6738:     \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
                   6739:       \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
                   6740:       \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
                   6741:       \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
                   6742:       \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
                   6743:       \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
                   6744:     }%
                   6745:   }
                   6746: \endgroup
                   6747: 
                   6748: % start the verbatim environment.
                   6749: \def\setupverbatim{%
                   6750:   \let\nonarrowing = t%
                   6751:   \nonfillstart
                   6752:   \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
                   6753:   % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines.  Otherwise, we would
                   6754:   % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
                   6755:   \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
                   6756:   \tabexpand
                   6757:   \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
                   6758:   % Respect line breaks,
                   6759:   % print special symbols as themselves, and
                   6760:   % make each space count.
                   6761:   % Must do in this order:
                   6762:   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
                   6763:   \everypar{\starttabbox}%
                   6764: }
                   6765: 
                   6766: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
                   6767: % delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
                   6768: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
                   6769: %
                   6770: %    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
                   6771: %
                   6772: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
                   6773: \begingroup
                   6774:   \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
                   6775:   \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
                   6776: \endgroup
                   6777: %
                   6778: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
                   6779: %
                   6780: %
                   6781: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
                   6782: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
                   6783: %
                   6784: %     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
                   6785: %
                   6786: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
                   6787: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
                   6788: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
                   6789: %
                   6790: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
                   6791: %
                   6792: \begingroup
                   6793:   \catcode`\ =\active
                   6794:   \obeylines %
                   6795:   % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
                   6796:   % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
                   6797:   % line in the output.
                   6798:   \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
                   6799:   % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
                   6800:   % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
                   6801: \endgroup
                   6802: %
                   6803: \envdef\verbatim{%
                   6804:     \setupverbatim\doverbatim
                   6805: }
                   6806: \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
                   6807: 
                   6808: 
                   6809: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
                   6810: %
                   6811: \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
                   6812: %
                   6813: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
                   6814:   {%
                   6815:     \makevalueexpandable
                   6816:     \setupverbatim
                   6817:     \indexnofonts       % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
                   6818:     \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
                   6819:     \input #1
                   6820:     \afterenvbreak
                   6821:   }%
                   6822: }
                   6823: 
                   6824: % @copying ... @end copying.
                   6825: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
                   6826: %
                   6827: % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
                   6828: % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
                   6829: % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
                   6830: % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
                   6831: % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
                   6832: % possible is very desirable.
                   6833: %
                   6834: \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
                   6835: \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
                   6836: %
                   6837: \def\insertcopying{%
                   6838:   \begingroup
                   6839:     \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
                   6840:     \scanexp\copyingtext
                   6841:   \endgroup
                   6842: }
                   6843: 
                   6844: 
                   6845: \message{defuns,}
                   6846: % @defun etc.
                   6847: 
                   6848: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
                   6849: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
                   6850: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
                   6851: \newcount\defunpenalty
                   6852: 
                   6853: % Start the processing of @deffn:
                   6854: \def\startdefun{%
                   6855:   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
                   6856:     \medbreak
                   6857:     \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
                   6858:                         % following @def command, see below.
                   6859:   \else
                   6860:     % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
                   6861:     % which is there to keep the function description together with its
                   6862:     % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
                   6863:     % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
                   6864:     % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
                   6865:     % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
                   6866:     % a break between a section heading and a defun.
                   6867:     %
                   6868:     % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
                   6869:     % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
                   6870:     % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
                   6871:     % @def command.
                   6872:     \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
                   6873:     %
                   6874:     % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
                   6875:     % But do insert the glue.
                   6876:     \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
                   6877:   \fi
                   6878:   %
                   6879:   \parindent=0in
                   6880:   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   6881:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   6882: }
                   6883: 
                   6884: \def\dodefunx#1{%
                   6885:   % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
                   6886:   \checkenv#1%
                   6887:   %
                   6888:   % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
                   6889:   % It's not a great place, though.
                   6890:   \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
                   6891:   %
                   6892:   % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
                   6893:   \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
                   6894: }
                   6895: \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
                   6896: 
                   6897: % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
                   6898: %
                   6899: \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
                   6900:   \begingroup
                   6901:     % call \deffnheader:
                   6902:     #1#2 \endheader
                   6903:     % common ending:
                   6904:     \interlinepenalty = 10000
                   6905:     \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
                   6906:     \endgraf
                   6907:     \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
                   6908:     \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
                   6909:     % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
                   6910:     % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
                   6911:     \checkparencounts
                   6912:   \endgroup
                   6913: }
                   6914: 
                   6915: \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
                   6916: 
                   6917: % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
                   6918: % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
                   6919: %
                   6920: \def\makedefun#1{%
                   6921:   \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
                   6922:   \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
                   6923:     \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
                   6924:   \temp
                   6925: }
                   6926: 
                   6927: % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
                   6928: %
                   6929: % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
                   6930: % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
                   6931: %
                   6932: \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
                   6933:   \envdef#1{%
                   6934:     \startdefun
                   6935:     \doingtypefnfalse    % distinguish typed functions from all else
                   6936:     \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
                   6937:   }%
                   6938:   \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
                   6939:   \def#3%
                   6940: }
                   6941: 
                   6942: \newif\ifdoingtypefn       % doing typed function?
                   6943: \newif\ifrettypeownline    % typeset return type on its own line?
                   6944: 
                   6945: % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
                   6946: % are printed on their own line.  This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
                   6947: % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
                   6948: % 
                   6949: \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
                   6950:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   6951:   \ifx\temp\onword
                   6952:     \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
                   6953:       = \empty
                   6954:   \else\ifx\temp\offword
                   6955:     \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
                   6956:       = \relax
                   6957:   \else
                   6958:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   6959:     \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
                   6960:                 must be on|off}%
                   6961:   \fi\fi
                   6962: }
                   6963: 
                   6964: % Untyped functions:
                   6965: 
                   6966: % @deffn category name args
                   6967: \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
                   6968: 
                   6969: % @deffn category class name args
                   6970: \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
                   6971: 
                   6972: % \defopon {category on}class name args
                   6973: \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
                   6974: 
                   6975: % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
                   6976: %
                   6977: \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
                   6978:   % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
                   6979:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
                   6980:   \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
                   6981: }
                   6982: 
                   6983: % Typed functions:
                   6984: 
                   6985: % @deftypefn category type name args
                   6986: \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
                   6987: 
                   6988: % @deftypeop category class type name args
                   6989: \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
                   6990: 
                   6991: % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
                   6992: \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
                   6993: 
                   6994: % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
                   6995: %
                   6996: \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
                   6997:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
                   6998:   \doingtypefntrue
                   6999:   \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
                   7000: }
                   7001: 
                   7002: % Typed variables:
                   7003: 
                   7004: % @deftypevr category type var args
                   7005: \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
                   7006: 
                   7007: % @deftypecv category class type var args
                   7008: \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
                   7009: 
                   7010: % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
                   7011: \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
                   7012: 
                   7013: % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
                   7014: %
                   7015: \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
                   7016:   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
                   7017:   \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
                   7018: }
                   7019: 
                   7020: % Untyped variables:
                   7021: 
                   7022: % @defvr category var args
                   7023: \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
                   7024: 
                   7025: % @defcv category class var args
                   7026: \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
                   7027: 
                   7028: % \defcvof {category of}class var args
                   7029: \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
                   7030: 
                   7031: % Types:
                   7032: 
                   7033: % @deftp category name args
                   7034: \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
                   7035:   \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
                   7036:   \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
                   7037: }
                   7038: 
                   7039: % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
                   7040: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
                   7041: \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
                   7042: \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
                   7043: \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
                   7044: \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
                   7045: \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
                   7046: \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
                   7047: \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
                   7048: \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
                   7049: \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
                   7050: \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
                   7051: 
                   7052: % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
                   7053: % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
                   7054: % #2 is the return type, if any.
                   7055: % #3 is the function name.
                   7056: %
                   7057: % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
                   7058: %
                   7059: \def\defname#1#2#3{%
                   7060:   \par
                   7061:   % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
                   7062:   \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
                   7063:   %
                   7064:   % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
                   7065:   % on a line by itself.
                   7066:   \rettypeownlinefalse
                   7067:   \ifdoingtypefn  % doing a typed function specifically?
                   7068:     % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
                   7069:     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
                   7070:       \rettypeownlinetrue
                   7071:     \fi
                   7072:   \fi
                   7073:   %
                   7074:   % How we'll format the category name.  Putting it in brackets helps
                   7075:   % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
                   7076:   % just below it.
                   7077:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   7078:   \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
                   7079:   %
                   7080:   % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.  We'll always have at
                   7081:   % least two.
                   7082:   \tempnum = 2
                   7083:   %
                   7084:   % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
                   7085:   % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
                   7086:   \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
                   7087:   %
                   7088:   % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
                   7089:   \ifrettypeownline
                   7090:     \advance\tempnum by 1
                   7091:     \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
                   7092:   \else
                   7093:     \def\maybeshapeline{}%
                   7094:   \fi
                   7095:   %
                   7096:   % The continuations:
                   7097:   \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
                   7098:   %
                   7099:   % The final paragraph shape:
                   7100:   \parshape \tempnum  0in \dimen0  \maybeshapeline  \defargsindent \dimen2
                   7101:   %
                   7102:   % Put the category name at the right margin.
                   7103:   \noindent
                   7104:   \hbox to 0pt{%
                   7105:     \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
                   7106:     % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
                   7107:     \kern\leftskip
                   7108:     % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
                   7109:   }%
                   7110:   %
                   7111:   % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
                   7112:   \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
                   7113:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   7114:   {%
                   7115:     % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
                   7116:     % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
                   7117:     % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
                   7118:     %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
                   7119:     %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
                   7120:     % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
                   7121:     % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
                   7122:     %   one has made identifiers using them :).
                   7123:     \df \tt
                   7124:     \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
                   7125:     \ifx\temp\empty\else
                   7126:       \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
                   7127:       \ifrettypeownline
                   7128:         % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
                   7129:         \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break  
                   7130:       \else
                   7131:         \space  % type on same line, so just followed by a space
                   7132:       \fi
                   7133:     \fi           % no return type
                   7134:     #3% output function name
                   7135:   }%
                   7136:   {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
                   7137:   %
                   7138:   \boldbrax
                   7139:   % arguments will be output next, if any.
                   7140: }
                   7141: 
                   7142: % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
                   7143: % tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
                   7144: % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
                   7145: % distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
                   7146: %
                   7147: \def\defunargs#1{%
                   7148:   % use sl by default (not ttsl),
                   7149:   % tt for the names.
                   7150:   \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
                   7151:   %
                   7152:   % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
                   7153:   % want a way to get ttsl.  We used to recommend @var for that, so
                   7154:   % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
                   7155:   % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
                   7156:   % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny.  @code also disables ?` !`.
                   7157:   \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
                   7158:   #1%
                   7159:   \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
                   7160: }
                   7161: 
                   7162: % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
                   7163: %
                   7164: \def\activeparens{%
                   7165:   \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
                   7166:   \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
                   7167:   \catcode`\&=\active
                   7168: }
                   7169: 
                   7170: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
                   7171: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
                   7172: 
                   7173: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
                   7174: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
                   7175: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
                   7176: {
                   7177:   \activeparens
                   7178:   \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
                   7179:   \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
                   7180:   \global\let& = \&
                   7181: 
                   7182:   \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
                   7183:   \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
                   7184: }
                   7185: 
                   7186: \newcount\parencount
                   7187: 
                   7188: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
                   7189: \newif\ifampseen
                   7190: \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
                   7191: 
                   7192: \def\parenfont{%
                   7193:   \ifampseen
                   7194:     % At the first level, print parens in roman,
                   7195:     % otherwise use the default font.
                   7196:     \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
                   7197:   \else
                   7198:     % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
                   7199:     % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
                   7200:     \sf
                   7201:   \fi
                   7202: }
                   7203: \def\infirstlevel#1{%
                   7204:   \ifampseen
                   7205:     \ifnum\parencount=1
                   7206:       #1%
                   7207:     \fi
                   7208:   \fi
                   7209: }
                   7210: \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
                   7211: 
                   7212: \def\opnr{%
                   7213:   \global\advance\parencount by 1
                   7214:   {\parenfont(}%
                   7215:   \infirstlevel \bfafterword
                   7216: }
                   7217: \def\clnr{%
                   7218:   {\parenfont)}%
                   7219:   \infirstlevel \sl
                   7220:   \global\advance\parencount by -1
                   7221: }
                   7222: 
                   7223: \newcount\brackcount
                   7224: \def\lbrb{%
                   7225:   \global\advance\brackcount by 1
                   7226:   {\bf[}%
                   7227: }
                   7228: \def\rbrb{%
                   7229:   {\bf]}%
                   7230:   \global\advance\brackcount by -1
                   7231: }
                   7232: 
                   7233: \def\checkparencounts{%
                   7234:   \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
                   7235:   \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
                   7236: }
                   7237: % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
                   7238: % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
                   7239: \def\badparencount{%
                   7240:   \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
                   7241:   \global\parencount=0
                   7242: }
                   7243: \def\badbrackcount{%
                   7244:   \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
                   7245:   \global\brackcount=0
                   7246: }
                   7247: 
                   7248: 
                   7249: \message{macros,}
                   7250: % @macro.
                   7251: 
                   7252: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
                   7253: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
                   7254: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
                   7255:   \newwrite\macscribble
                   7256:   \def\scantokens#1{%
                   7257:     \toks0={#1}%
                   7258:     \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
                   7259:     \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
                   7260:     \immediate\closeout\macscribble
                   7261:     \input \jobname.tmp
                   7262:   }
                   7263: \fi
                   7264: 
                   7265: \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
                   7266:   \newlinechar`\^^M
                   7267:   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
                   7268:   %
                   7269:   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
                   7270:   % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
                   7271:   % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
                   7272:   % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
                   7273:   % with macro expansion.                              --kasal, 19aug04
                   7274:   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
                   7275:   %
                   7276:   % ... and for \example:
                   7277:   \spaceisspace
                   7278:   %
                   7279:   % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
                   7280:   % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence.  It does not
                   7281:   % eat a catcode 13 newline.  There's no good way to handle the two
                   7282:   % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
                   7283:   % would then have different behavior).  See the Macro Details node in
                   7284:   % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
                   7285:   % line-oriented commands.
                   7286:   % 
                   7287:   \scantokens{#1\empty}%
                   7288: \endgroup}
                   7289: 
                   7290: \def\scanexp#1{%
                   7291:   \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
                   7292:   \temp
                   7293: }
                   7294: 
                   7295: \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
                   7296: \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
                   7297: \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
                   7298: 
                   7299: % List of all defined macros in the form
                   7300: %    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
                   7301: % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
                   7302: % if there is a need.
                   7303: \def\macrolist{}
                   7304: 
                   7305: % Add the macro to \macrolist
                   7306: \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
                   7307: \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
                   7308:      \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
                   7309:      \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
                   7310: }
                   7311: 
                   7312: % Utility routines.
                   7313: % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
                   7314: %   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
                   7315: % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
                   7316: %
                   7317: \def\cslet#1#2{%
                   7318:   \expandafter\let
                   7319:   \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
                   7320:   \csname#2\endcsname
                   7321: }
                   7322: 
                   7323: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
                   7324: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
                   7325: {\catcode`\@=11
                   7326: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
                   7327: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
                   7328: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
                   7329: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
                   7330: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
                   7331: }
                   7332: 
                   7333: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
                   7334: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
                   7335: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
                   7336: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
                   7337: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
                   7338: }
                   7339: 
                   7340: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
                   7341: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
                   7342: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
                   7343: % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
                   7344: %
                   7345: % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
                   7346: % them to avoid their expansion.  Must do this non-globally, to
                   7347: % confine the change to the current group.
                   7348: %
                   7349: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
                   7350: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
                   7351: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
                   7352: %
                   7353: \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
                   7354:   \catcode`\"=\other
                   7355:   \catcode`\+=\other
                   7356:   \catcode`\<=\other
                   7357:   \catcode`\>=\other
                   7358:   \catcode`\@=\other
                   7359:   \catcode`\^=\other
                   7360:   \catcode`\_=\other
                   7361:   \catcode`\|=\other
                   7362:   \catcode`\~=\other
                   7363:   \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
                   7364: }
                   7365: 
                   7366: \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
                   7367:   \scanctxt
                   7368:   \catcode`\\=\other
                   7369:   \catcode`\^^M=\other
                   7370: }
                   7371: 
                   7372: \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
                   7373:   \scanctxt
                   7374:   \catcode`\{=\other
                   7375:   \catcode`\}=\other
                   7376:   \catcode`\^^M=\other
                   7377:   \usembodybackslash
                   7378: }
                   7379: 
                   7380: \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
                   7381:   \scanctxt
                   7382:   \catcode`\\=0
                   7383: }
                   7384: % why catcode 0 for \ in the above?  To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
                   7385: % for the single characters \ { }.  Thus, we end up with the "commands"
                   7386: % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
                   7387: % 
                   7388: % We already have @{ and @}.  For @\, we define it here, and only for
                   7389: % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
                   7390: % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
                   7391: %
                   7392: \def\\{\normalbackslash}%
                   7393: % 
                   7394: % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
                   7395: % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
                   7396: % cedilla accent.  Documents must use @comma{} instead.
                   7397: %
                   7398: % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
                   7399: 
                   7400: 
                   7401: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
                   7402: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
                   7403: % where N is the macro parameter number.
                   7404: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
                   7405: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
                   7406: %
                   7407: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
                   7408:  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
                   7409:  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
                   7410: }
                   7411: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
                   7412: 
                   7413: \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
                   7414: 
                   7415: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
                   7416: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
                   7417: 
                   7418: \def\macroxxx#1{%
                   7419:   \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
                   7420:   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
                   7421:      \paramno=0\relax
                   7422:   \else
                   7423:      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
                   7424:      \if\paramno>256\relax
                   7425:        \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
                   7426:          \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   7427:          \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
                   7428:        \fi
                   7429:      \fi
                   7430:   \fi
                   7431:   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
                   7432:      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
                   7433:   \else
                   7434:      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
                   7435:      \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
                   7436:      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
                   7437:      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
                   7438:      \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
                   7439:   \fi
                   7440:   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
                   7441:   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
                   7442:   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
                   7443:   \fi}
                   7444: 
                   7445: \parseargdef\unmacro{%
                   7446:   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
                   7447:     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
                   7448:     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
                   7449:     % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
                   7450:     \begingroup
                   7451:       \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
                   7452:       \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
                   7453:       \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
                   7454:     \endgroup
                   7455:   \else
                   7456:     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
                   7457:   \fi
                   7458: }
                   7459: 
                   7460: % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
                   7461: % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
                   7462: %
                   7463: \def\unmacrodo#1{%
                   7464:   \ifx #1\relax
                   7465:     % remove this
                   7466:   \else
                   7467:     \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
                   7468:   \fi
                   7469: }
                   7470: 
                   7471: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
                   7472: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
                   7473: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
                   7474: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
                   7475: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
                   7476: \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
                   7477: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
                   7478: 
                   7479: % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
                   7480: \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
                   7481: \catcode `@=11\relax
                   7482: 
                   7483: % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
                   7484: % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
                   7485: % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded.  If
                   7486: % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
                   7487: % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
                   7488: % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.  
                   7489: %
                   7490: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
                   7491: %
                   7492: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
                   7493: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
                   7494: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
                   7495: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
                   7496: %
                   7497: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
                   7498: % the macro is used.
                   7499: %
                   7500: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
                   7501: % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
                   7502: % processed again to replace the arguments.
                   7503: %
                   7504: % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
                   7505: % argument N value and then \edef  the body (nothing else will expand because of
                   7506: % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
                   7507: %
                   7508: % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
                   7509: % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
                   7510: % error is produced.
                   7511: \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
                   7512:   \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
                   7513:   \let\hash\relax
                   7514:   \let\xeatspaces\relax
                   7515:   \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
                   7516:   % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
                   7517:   % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
                   7518:   % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
                   7519:   % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
                   7520:   % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
                   7521:   % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
                   7522:   \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
                   7523:     \paramno0\relax
                   7524:     \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
                   7525:   \fi
                   7526: }
                   7527: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
                   7528:   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
                   7529:   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
                   7530:     \advance\paramno by 1
                   7531:     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
                   7532:         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
                   7533:     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
                   7534:   \fi\next}
                   7535: 
                   7536: \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
                   7537:   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
                   7538:   \else 
                   7539:     \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
                   7540:     \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
                   7541:     \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
                   7542:        \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
                   7543:     % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
                   7544:     % don't want \the  to be expanded in the \parsermacbody  as it uses an
                   7545:     % \xdef .
                   7546:     \expandafter\edef\tempa
                   7547:       {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
                   7548:     \advance\paramno by 1\relax
                   7549:   \fi\next}
                   7550: 
                   7551: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
                   7552: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
                   7553: %
                   7554: 
                   7555: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
                   7556: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
                   7557: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
                   7558: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
                   7559: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
                   7560: \catcode `\@=11\relax
                   7561: 
                   7562: \let\endargs@\relax
                   7563: \let\nil@\relax
                   7564: \def\nilm@{\nil@}%
                   7565: \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
                   7566: 
                   7567: % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
                   7568: % definition.  It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
                   7569: % macarg.ARGNAME
                   7570: %
                   7571: % #1 is the macro name
                   7572: % #2 is the list of argument names
                   7573: % #3 is the list of argument values
                   7574: \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
                   7575:   \def\macargdeflist@{}%
                   7576:   \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
                   7577:   \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
                   7578:   \def\macroname{#1}%
                   7579:   \begingroup
                   7580:   \macroargctxt
                   7581:   \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
                   7582:   \def\@tempa{#3}%
                   7583:   \ifx\@tempa\empty
                   7584:     \setemptyargvalues@
                   7585:   \else
                   7586:     \getargvals@@
                   7587:   \fi
                   7588: }
                   7589: 
                   7590: % 
                   7591: \def\getargvals@@{%
                   7592:   \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
                   7593:       % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
                   7594:       \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
                   7595:       \else
                   7596:         \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   7597:         \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
                   7598:       \fi
                   7599:       \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
                   7600:   \else
                   7601:     \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
                   7602:        % No more arguments values passed to macro.  Set remaining named-arg
                   7603:        % macros to empty.
                   7604:        \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
                   7605:     \else
                   7606:       % pop current arg name into \@tempb
                   7607:       \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
                   7608:       \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
                   7609:        % pop current argument value into \@tempc
                   7610:       \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
                   7611:       \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
                   7612:        % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
                   7613:        % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
                   7614:        \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
                   7615:        \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
                   7616:        \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
                   7617:          \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
                   7618:        \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
                   7619:        \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
                   7620:        \let\next\getargvals@@
                   7621:     \fi
                   7622:   \fi
                   7623:   \next
                   7624: }
                   7625: 
                   7626: \def\push@#1#2{%
                   7627:   \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
                   7628:   \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
                   7629:   \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
                   7630:   \expandafter#1#2}%
                   7631: }
                   7632: 
                   7633: % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
                   7634: % in macro \@tempa
                   7635: \def\macvalstoargs@{%
                   7636:   %  To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
                   7637:   % within an \edef  expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
                   7638:   % values into respective token registers.
                   7639:   %
                   7640:   % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
                   7641:   \begingroup
                   7642:     \paramno0\relax
                   7643:     % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
                   7644:     % value into a new token list register \toks#N
                   7645:     \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
                   7646:     % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
                   7647:     % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
                   7648:     % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
                   7649:     \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
                   7650:     % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
                   7651:     % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
                   7652:     % group.
                   7653:     \expandafter
                   7654:   \endgroup
                   7655:   \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
                   7656:   }
                   7657: 
                   7658: \def\macargexpandinbody@{% 
                   7659:   %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 
                   7660:   \expandafter
                   7661:   \endgroup
                   7662:   \macargdeflist@
                   7663:   % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
                   7664:   % is in \@tempa .
                   7665:   \macvalstoargs@
                   7666:   % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
                   7667:   % with \@tempb .
                   7668:   \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
                   7669:   % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
                   7670:   % \egroup .
                   7671:   \ifx\@tempb\gobble
                   7672:      \let\@tempc\relax
                   7673:   \else
                   7674:      \let\@tempc\egroup
                   7675:   \fi
                   7676:   % And now we do the real job:
                   7677:   \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
                   7678:   \@tempd
                   7679: }
                   7680: 
                   7681: \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
                   7682:   \if#1;\let\next\relax
                   7683:   \else
                   7684:     \let\next\putargsintokens@
                   7685:     % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
                   7686:     % alias \@tempb .
                   7687:     \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
                   7688:     % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
                   7689:     \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
                   7690:     \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
                   7691:     \advance\paramno by 1\relax
                   7692:   \fi
                   7693:   \next
                   7694: }
                   7695: 
                   7696: % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
                   7697: \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
                   7698: % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
                   7699: \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
                   7700: % newtoks that can be used non \outer .
                   7701: \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
                   7702: 
                   7703: % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
                   7704: \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
                   7705:   \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
                   7706:     \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
                   7707:   \else
                   7708:     \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
                   7709:     \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
                   7710:   \fi
                   7711:   \next
                   7712: }
                   7713: 
                   7714: \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
                   7715:   \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
                   7716:     \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
                   7717:   \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
                   7718:   \def\paramlist{#2}%
                   7719: }
                   7720: 
                   7721: % #1 is the element target macro
                   7722: % #2 is the list macro
                   7723: % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
                   7724: \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
                   7725:    \def#1{#3}%
                   7726:    \def#2{#4}%
                   7727: }
                   7728: \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
                   7729:    \long\def#1{#3}%
                   7730:    \long\def#2{#4}%
                   7731: }
                   7732: 
                   7733: % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
                   7734: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
                   7735: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
                   7736: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
                   7737: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
                   7738: %
                   7739: \def\defmacro{%
                   7740:   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
                   7741:   \ifrecursive
                   7742:     \ifcase\paramno
                   7743:     % 0
                   7744:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7745:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
                   7746:     \or % 1
                   7747:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7748:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   7749:          \noexpand\braceorline
                   7750:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
                   7751:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
                   7752:          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
                   7753:     \else
                   7754:       \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
                   7755:         \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7756:            \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   7757:            \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
                   7758:         \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
                   7759:             \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
                   7760:         \expandafter\expandafter
                   7761:         \expandafter\xdef
                   7762:         \expandafter\expandafter
                   7763:           \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
                   7764:             \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
                   7765:       \else % 10 or more
                   7766:         \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7767:           \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
                   7768:         }%    
                   7769:         \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
                   7770:         \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
                   7771:       \fi
                   7772:     \fi
                   7773:   \else
                   7774:     \ifcase\paramno
                   7775:     % 0
                   7776:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7777:         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
                   7778:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
                   7779:     \or % 1
                   7780:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7781:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   7782:          \noexpand\braceorline
                   7783:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
                   7784:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
                   7785:         \egroup
                   7786:         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
                   7787:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
                   7788:     \else % at most 9
                   7789:       \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
                   7790:         \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7791:            \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   7792:            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
                   7793:         \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
                   7794:             \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
                   7795:         \expandafter\expandafter
                   7796:         \expandafter\xdef
                   7797:         \expandafter\expandafter
                   7798:         \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
                   7799:         \paramlist{%
                   7800:             \egroup
                   7801:             \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
                   7802:             \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
                   7803:       \else % 10 or more:
                   7804:         \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   7805:           \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
                   7806:         }%
                   7807:         \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
                   7808:         \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
                   7809:       \fi
                   7810:     \fi
                   7811:   \fi}
                   7812: 
                   7813: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
                   7814: 
                   7815: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
                   7816: 
                   7817: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
                   7818: % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
                   7819: % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
                   7820: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
                   7821: % 
                   7822: \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
                   7823: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
                   7824:   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
                   7825:     \expandafter\parsearg
                   7826:   \fi \macnamexxx}
                   7827: 
                   7828: 
                   7829: % @alias.
                   7830: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
                   7831: % sign.  Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
                   7832: %
                   7833: \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
                   7834: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
                   7835: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
                   7836:   {%
                   7837:     \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
                   7838:     \addtomacrolist{#1}%
                   7839:     \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
                   7840:   }%
                   7841:   \next
                   7842: }
                   7843: 
                   7844: 
                   7845: \message{cross references,}
                   7846: 
                   7847: \newwrite\auxfile
                   7848: \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
                   7849: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
                   7850: 
                   7851: % @inforef is relatively simple.
                   7852: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
                   7853: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
                   7854:   \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
                   7855:   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
                   7856: 
                   7857: % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
                   7858: % cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
                   7859: % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
                   7860: % @node foo , bar , ...
                   7861: % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
                   7862: %
                   7863: \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
                   7864: %
                   7865: % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
                   7866: % @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
                   7867: \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
                   7868: \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
                   7869: 
                   7870: \let\nwnode=\node
                   7871: \let\lastnode=\empty
                   7872: 
                   7873: % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
                   7874: % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
                   7875: %
                   7876: \def\donoderef#1{%
                   7877:   \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
                   7878:     \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
                   7879:     \global\let\lastnode=\empty
                   7880:   \fi
                   7881: }
                   7882: 
                   7883: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
                   7884: %
                   7885: \newcount\savesfregister
                   7886: %
                   7887: \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
                   7888: \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
                   7889: \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
                   7890: 
                   7891: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
                   7892: % anchor), which consists of three parts:
                   7893: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
                   7894: %                 or the anchor name.
                   7895: % 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
                   7896: %                 empty for anchors.
                   7897: % 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
                   7898: %
                   7899: % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
                   7900: % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
                   7901: % 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
                   7902: %
                   7903: \def\setref#1#2{%
                   7904:   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
                   7905:   \iflinks
                   7906:     {%
                   7907:       \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
                   7908:       \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
                   7909:        \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
                   7910:          ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
                   7911:       }%
                   7912:       \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
                   7913:       \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
                   7914:       \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
                   7915:       \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
                   7916:     }%
                   7917:   \fi
                   7918: }
                   7919: 
                   7920: % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
                   7921: % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
                   7922: % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
                   7923: % variable, now it's official.
                   7924: % 
                   7925: \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
                   7926:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   7927:   \ifx\temp\onword
                   7928:     \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
                   7929:       = \empty
                   7930:   \else\ifx\temp\offword
                   7931:     \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
                   7932:       = \relax
                   7933:   \else
                   7934:     \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   7935:     \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
                   7936:                 must be on|off}%
                   7937:   \fi\fi
                   7938: }
                   7939: 
                   7940: % 
                   7941: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
                   7942: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
                   7943: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
                   7944: % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
                   7945: %
                   7946: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
                   7947: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
                   7948: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
                   7949: %
                   7950: \newbox\toprefbox
                   7951: \newbox\printedrefnamebox
                   7952: \newbox\infofilenamebox
                   7953: \newbox\printedmanualbox
                   7954: %
                   7955: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
                   7956:   \unsepspaces
                   7957:   %
                   7958:   % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
                   7959:   \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
                   7960:   \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
                   7961:   %
                   7962:   \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
                   7963:   \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
                   7964:   %
                   7965:   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
                   7966:   \setbox\printedmanualbox  = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
                   7967:   %
                   7968:   % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
                   7969:   % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
                   7970:   \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
                   7971:     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
                   7972:     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
                   7973:       % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
                   7974:       \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
                   7975:     \else
                   7976:       % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
                   7977:       % the square brackets if we have it.
                   7978:       \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
                   7979:         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
                   7980:         \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
                   7981:       \else
                   7982:         \ifhavexrefs
                   7983:           % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
                   7984:           \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
                   7985:         \else
                   7986:           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
                   7987:           \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
                   7988:         \fi%
                   7989:       \fi
                   7990:     \fi
                   7991:   \fi
                   7992:   %
                   7993:   % Make link in pdf output.
                   7994:   \ifpdf
                   7995:     {\indexnofonts
                   7996:      \turnoffactive
                   7997:      \makevalueexpandable
                   7998:      % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
                   7999:      % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.  This ignores all spaces in
                   8000:      % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
                   8001:      \getfilename{#4}%
                   8002:      %
                   8003:      % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
                   8004:      % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
                   8005:      \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
                   8006:      \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
                   8007:        \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
                   8008:      \else
                   8009:        \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest  % escape PDF special chars
                   8010:      \fi
                   8011:      %
                   8012:      \leavevmode
                   8013:      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
                   8014:      \ifnum\filenamelength>0
                   8015:        goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
                   8016:      \else
                   8017:        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
                   8018:      \fi
                   8019:     }%
                   8020:     \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
                   8021:   \fi
                   8022:   %
                   8023:   % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
                   8024:   % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
                   8025:   % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
                   8026:   {%
                   8027:     % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
                   8028:     % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
                   8029:     \indexnofonts
                   8030:     \turnoffactive
                   8031:     \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
                   8032:       \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
                   8033:   }%
                   8034:   \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
                   8035:     % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
                   8036:     % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
                   8037:     \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
                   8038:       \refx{#1-snt}{}%
                   8039:     \else
                   8040:       \printedrefname
                   8041:     \fi
                   8042:     %
                   8043:     % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
                   8044:     % "in MANUALNAME".
                   8045:     \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
                   8046:       \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
                   8047:     \fi
                   8048:   \else
                   8049:     % node/anchor (non-float) references.
                   8050:     % 
                   8051:     % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
                   8052:     % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
                   8053:     % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
                   8054:     % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
                   8055:     % this is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name
                   8056:     % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
                   8057:     % 
                   8058:     \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
                   8059:       % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
                   8060:       % 
                   8061:       \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
                   8062:     %
                   8063:     \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
                   8064:       % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
                   8065:       % printed manual name (arg 5).  This is essentially the same as
                   8066:       % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
                   8067:       % 
                   8068:       \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
                   8069:     %
                   8070:     \else
                   8071:       % Reference within this manual.
                   8072:       %
                   8073:       % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
                   8074:       % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
                   8075:       % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
                   8076:       % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
                   8077:       % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
                   8078:       {\turnoffactive
                   8079:        % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
                   8080:        % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
                   8081:        \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
                   8082:        \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
                   8083:       }%
                   8084:       % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
                   8085:       \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
                   8086:       %
                   8087:       % But we always want a comma and a space:
                   8088:       ,\space
                   8089:       %
                   8090:       % output the `page 3'.
                   8091:       \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
                   8092:     \fi\fi
                   8093:   \fi
                   8094:   \endlink
                   8095: \endgroup}
                   8096: 
                   8097: % Output a cross-manual xref to #1.  Used just above (twice).
                   8098: % 
                   8099: % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
                   8100: % missing or Top.  Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
                   8101: % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
                   8102: % 
                   8103: % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
                   8104: % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
                   8105: % the input.  By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
                   8106: % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
                   8107: % in a monospaced font).  Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
                   8108: % 
                   8109: % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
                   8110: % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
                   8111: % 
                   8112: \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
                   8113:   \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
                   8114:   \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
                   8115:   \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp  % nonempty?
                   8116:     \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else  % same as Top?
                   8117:       \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
                   8118:     \fi
                   8119:   \fi
                   8120:   #1%
                   8121: }
                   8122: 
                   8123: % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
                   8124: % output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
                   8125: % since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
                   8126: % one that Bob is working on :).
                   8127: %
                   8128: \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
                   8129: 
                   8130: % Things referred to by \setref.
                   8131: %
                   8132: \def\Ynothing{}
                   8133: \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
                   8134: \def\Ynumbered{%
                   8135:   \ifnum\secno=0
                   8136:     \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
                   8137:   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
                   8138:     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
                   8139:   \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
                   8140:     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
                   8141:   \else
                   8142:     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
                   8143:   \fi\fi\fi
                   8144: }
                   8145: \def\Yappendix{%
                   8146:   \ifnum\secno=0
                   8147:      \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
                   8148:   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
                   8149:      \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
                   8150:   \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
                   8151:     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
                   8152:   \else
                   8153:     \putwordSection@tie
                   8154:       @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
                   8155:   \fi\fi\fi
                   8156: }
                   8157: 
                   8158: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
                   8159: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
                   8160: %
                   8161: \def\refx#1#2{%
                   8162:   {%
                   8163:     \indexnofonts
                   8164:     \otherbackslash
                   8165:     \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
                   8166:       \csname XR#1\endcsname
                   8167:   }%
                   8168:   \ifx\thisrefX\relax
                   8169:     % If not defined, say something at least.
                   8170:     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
                   8171:     \iflinks
                   8172:       \ifhavexrefs
                   8173:         {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
                   8174:          \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
                   8175:       \else
                   8176:         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
                   8177:           \global\warnedxrefstrue
                   8178:           \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
                   8179:         \fi
                   8180:       \fi
                   8181:     \fi
                   8182:   \else
                   8183:     % It's defined, so just use it.
                   8184:     \thisrefX
                   8185:   \fi
                   8186:   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
                   8187: }
                   8188: 
                   8189: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
                   8190: % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
                   8191: % collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
                   8192: %
                   8193: \def\xrdef#1#2{%
                   8194:   {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
                   8195:    % implementation are changed to commands like @'e.  Don't let these
                   8196:    % mess up the control sequence name.
                   8197:     \indexnofonts
                   8198:     \turnoffactive
                   8199:     \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
                   8200:   }%
                   8201:   %
                   8202:   \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
                   8203:   %
                   8204:   % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
                   8205:   \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
                   8206:     % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
                   8207:     \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
                   8208:       \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
                   8209:     %
                   8210:     % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
                   8211:     \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
                   8212:       \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
                   8213:     \else
                   8214:       % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
                   8215:       \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
                   8216:     \fi
                   8217:     %
                   8218:     % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
                   8219:     % for later use in \listoffloats.
                   8220:     \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
                   8221:       {\safexrefname}}%
                   8222:   \fi
                   8223: }
                   8224: 
                   8225: % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
                   8226: %
                   8227: \def\tryauxfile{%
                   8228:   \openin 1 \jobname.aux
                   8229:   \ifeof 1 \else
                   8230:     \readdatafile{aux}%
                   8231:     \global\havexrefstrue
                   8232:   \fi
                   8233:   \closein 1
                   8234: }
                   8235: 
                   8236: \def\setupdatafile{%
                   8237:   \catcode`\^^@=\other
                   8238:   \catcode`\^^A=\other
                   8239:   \catcode`\^^B=\other
                   8240:   \catcode`\^^C=\other
                   8241:   \catcode`\^^D=\other
                   8242:   \catcode`\^^E=\other
                   8243:   \catcode`\^^F=\other
                   8244:   \catcode`\^^G=\other
                   8245:   \catcode`\^^H=\other
                   8246:   \catcode`\^^K=\other
                   8247:   \catcode`\^^L=\other
                   8248:   \catcode`\^^N=\other
                   8249:   \catcode`\^^P=\other
                   8250:   \catcode`\^^Q=\other
                   8251:   \catcode`\^^R=\other
                   8252:   \catcode`\^^S=\other
                   8253:   \catcode`\^^T=\other
                   8254:   \catcode`\^^U=\other
                   8255:   \catcode`\^^V=\other
                   8256:   \catcode`\^^W=\other
                   8257:   \catcode`\^^X=\other
                   8258:   \catcode`\^^Z=\other
                   8259:   \catcode`\^^[=\other
                   8260:   \catcode`\^^\=\other
                   8261:   \catcode`\^^]=\other
                   8262:   \catcode`\^^^=\other
                   8263:   \catcode`\^^_=\other
                   8264:   % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
                   8265:   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
                   8266:   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
                   8267:   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
                   8268:   % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
                   8269:   % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
                   8270:   % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
                   8271:   % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
                   8272:   %
                   8273:   % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
                   8274:   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
                   8275:   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
                   8276:   %
                   8277:   \catcode`\^=\other
                   8278:   %
                   8279:   % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
                   8280:   \catcode`\~=\other
                   8281:   \catcode`\[=\other
                   8282:   \catcode`\]=\other
                   8283:   \catcode`\"=\other
                   8284:   \catcode`\_=\other
                   8285:   \catcode`\|=\other
                   8286:   \catcode`\<=\other
                   8287:   \catcode`\>=\other
                   8288:   \catcode`\$=\other
                   8289:   \catcode`\#=\other
                   8290:   \catcode`\&=\other
                   8291:   \catcode`\%=\other
                   8292:   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
                   8293:   %
                   8294:   % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
                   8295:   % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
                   8296:   % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
                   8297:   % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
                   8298:   % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
                   8299:   % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
                   8300:   % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
                   8301:   \catcode`\\=\other
                   8302:   %
                   8303:   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
                   8304:   {%
                   8305:     \count1=128
                   8306:     \def\loop{%
                   8307:       \catcode\count1=\other
                   8308:       \advance\count1 by 1
                   8309:       \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
                   8310:     }%
                   8311:   }%
                   8312:   %
                   8313:   % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
                   8314:   \catcode`\{=1
                   8315:   \catcode`\}=2
                   8316:   \catcode`\@=0
                   8317: }
                   8318: 
                   8319: \def\readdatafile#1{%
                   8320: \begingroup
                   8321:   \setupdatafile
                   8322:   \input\jobname.#1
                   8323: \endgroup}
                   8324: 
                   8325: 
                   8326: \message{insertions,}
                   8327: % including footnotes.
                   8328: 
                   8329: \newcount \footnoteno
                   8330: 
                   8331: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
                   8332: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
                   8333: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
                   8334: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
                   8335: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
                   8336: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
                   8337: 
                   8338: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
                   8339: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
                   8340: 
                   8341: {\catcode `\@=11
                   8342: %
                   8343: % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
                   8344: \gdef\footnote{%
                   8345:   \let\indent=\ptexindent
                   8346:   \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
                   8347:   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
                   8348:   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
                   8349:   %
                   8350:   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
                   8351:   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
                   8352:   \let\@sf\empty
                   8353:   \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
                   8354:   %
                   8355:   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
                   8356:   \unskip
                   8357:   \thisfootno\@sf
                   8358:   \dofootnote
                   8359: }%
                   8360: 
                   8361: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
                   8362: % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
                   8363: %
                   8364: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
                   8365: % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
                   8366: % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
                   8367: %
                   8368: \gdef\dofootnote{%
                   8369:   \insert\footins\bgroup
                   8370:   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
                   8371:   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
                   8372:   % So reset some parameters.
                   8373:   \hsize=\pagewidth
                   8374:   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
                   8375:   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
                   8376:   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
                   8377:   \floatingpenalty\@MM
                   8378:   \leftskip\z@skip
                   8379:   \rightskip\z@skip
                   8380:   \spaceskip\z@skip
                   8381:   \xspaceskip\z@skip
                   8382:   \parindent\defaultparindent
                   8383:   %
                   8384:   \smallfonts \rm
                   8385:   %
                   8386:   % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
                   8387:   % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
                   8388:   % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
                   8389:   % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
                   8390:   \let\noindent = \relax
                   8391:   %
                   8392:   % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
                   8393:   % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
                   8394:   \everypar = {\hang}%
                   8395:   \textindent{\thisfootno}%
                   8396:   %
                   8397:   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
                   8398:   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
                   8399:   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
                   8400:   \footstrut
                   8401:   %
                   8402:   % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
                   8403:   \futurelet\next\fo@t
                   8404: }
                   8405: }%end \catcode `\@=11
                   8406: 
                   8407: % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
                   8408: % the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
                   8409: % would be lost.
                   8410: % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
                   8411: % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
                   8412: % And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
                   8413: 
                   8414: % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
                   8415: % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
                   8416: % out prematurely.
                   8417: %
                   8418: \def\startsavinginserts{%
                   8419:   \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
                   8420:     \let\insert\saveinsert
                   8421:   \else
                   8422:     \let\checkinserts\relax
                   8423:   \fi
                   8424: }
                   8425: 
                   8426: % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
                   8427: % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
                   8428: %
                   8429: \def\saveinsert#1{%
                   8430:   \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
                   8431:   \afterassignment\next
                   8432:   % swallow the left brace
                   8433:   \let\temp =
                   8434: }
                   8435: \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
                   8436: \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
                   8437: 
                   8438: \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
                   8439: 
                   8440: \def\placesaveins#1{%
                   8441:   \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
                   8442:     {\box#1}%
                   8443: }
                   8444: 
                   8445: % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
                   8446: {
                   8447:   \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
                   8448:   \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
                   8449: }
                   8450: 
                   8451: % initialization:
                   8452: \def\newsaveins #1{%
                   8453:   \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
                   8454:   \next
                   8455: }
                   8456: \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
                   8457:   \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
                   8458:   \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
                   8459:     \checksaveins #1}%
                   8460: }
                   8461: 
                   8462: % initialize:
                   8463: \let\checkinserts\empty
                   8464: \newsaveins\footins
                   8465: \newsaveins\margin
                   8466: 
                   8467: 
                   8468: % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
                   8469: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
                   8470: %
                   8471: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
                   8472: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
                   8473: % undone and the next image would fail.
                   8474: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
                   8475: \ifeof 1 \else
                   8476:   % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
                   8477:   % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
                   8478:   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
                   8479:   \input epsf.tex
                   8480: \fi
                   8481: \closein 1
                   8482: %
                   8483: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
                   8484: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
                   8485: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
                   8486:   work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
                   8487:   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
                   8488: %
                   8489: \def\image#1{%
                   8490:   \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
                   8491:     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
                   8492:       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
                   8493:       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
                   8494:       \global\warnednoepsftrue
                   8495:     \fi
                   8496:   \else
                   8497:     \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
                   8498:   \fi
                   8499: }
                   8500: %
                   8501: % Arguments to @image:
                   8502: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
                   8503: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
                   8504: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
                   8505: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
                   8506: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
                   8507: \newif\ifimagevmode
                   8508: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
                   8509:   \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
                   8510:   \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
                   8511:   % If the image is by itself, center it.
                   8512:   \ifvmode
                   8513:     \imagevmodetrue
                   8514:   \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
                   8515:     % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
                   8516:     \imagevmodetrue
                   8517:     \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
                   8518:   \fi\fi
                   8519:   %
                   8520:   \ifimagevmode
                   8521:     \nobreak\medskip
                   8522:     % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
                   8523:     % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
                   8524:     % above and below.
                   8525:     \nobreak\vskip\parskip
                   8526:     \nobreak
                   8527:   \fi
                   8528:   %
                   8529:   % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
                   8530:   %  environment such as @quotation is respected.
                   8531:   % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
                   8532:   %  normal paragraph indentation.
                   8533:   % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
                   8534:   %  want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
                   8535:   %  eradicate the centering.
                   8536:   \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
                   8537:   %
                   8538:   % Output the image.
                   8539:   \ifpdf
                   8540:     \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
                   8541:   \else
                   8542:     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
                   8543:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
                   8544:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
                   8545:     \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
                   8546:   \fi
                   8547:   %
                   8548:   \ifimagevmode
                   8549:     \medskip  % space after a standalone image
                   8550:   \fi  
                   8551:   \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
                   8552: \endgroup}
                   8553: 
                   8554: 
                   8555: % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
                   8556: % etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
                   8557: % float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
                   8558: %
                   8559: \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
                   8560: 
                   8561: % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
                   8562: \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
                   8563: 
                   8564: % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
                   8565: % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
                   8566: % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
                   8567: %
                   8568: % #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
                   8569: % be referable.
                   8570: %
                   8571: % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
                   8572: % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
                   8573: %
                   8574: % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
                   8575: % chapter-level command.
                   8576: \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
                   8577: %
                   8578: \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
                   8579:   \let\thiscaption=\empty
                   8580:   \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
                   8581:   %
                   8582:   % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
                   8583:   %
                   8584:   % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
                   8585:   % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
                   8586:   %
                   8587:   \startsavinginserts
                   8588:   %
                   8589:   % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
                   8590:   \par
                   8591:   %
                   8592:   \vtop\bgroup
                   8593:     \def\floattype{#1}%
                   8594:     \def\floatlabel{#2}%
                   8595:     \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
                   8596:     %
                   8597:     \ifx\floattype\empty
                   8598:       \let\safefloattype=\empty
                   8599:     \else
                   8600:       {%
                   8601:         % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
                   8602:         % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
                   8603:         \indexnofonts
                   8604:         \turnoffactive
                   8605:         \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
                   8606:       }%
                   8607:     \fi
                   8608:     %
                   8609:     % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
                   8610:     \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
                   8611:       % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
                   8612:       % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
                   8613:       %
                   8614:       \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
                   8615:       \global\advance\floatno by 1
                   8616:       %
                   8617:       {%
                   8618:         % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
                   8619:         % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
                   8620:         % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
                   8621:         % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
                   8622:         % lists of floats.
                   8623:         %
                   8624:         \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
                   8625:         \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
                   8626:       }%
                   8627:     \fi
                   8628:     %
                   8629:     % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
                   8630:     \vskip\parskip
                   8631:     %
                   8632:     % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
                   8633:     \restorefirstparagraphindent
                   8634: }
                   8635: 
                   8636: % we have these possibilities:
                   8637: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
                   8638: % @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
                   8639: % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
                   8640: % @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
                   8641: % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
                   8642: % @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
                   8643: % @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
                   8644: % @float & no caption:
                   8645: %
                   8646: \def\Efloat{%
                   8647:     \let\floatident = \empty
                   8648:     %
                   8649:     % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
                   8650:     \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
                   8651:     %
                   8652:     % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
                   8653:     \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
                   8654:       \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
                   8655:         \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
                   8656:       \fi
                   8657:       % the number.
                   8658:       \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
                   8659:     \fi
                   8660:     %
                   8661:     % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
                   8662:     % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
                   8663:     \let\captionline = \floatident
                   8664:     %
                   8665:     \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
                   8666:       \ifx\floatident\empty \else
                   8667:        \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
                   8668:       \fi
                   8669:       %
                   8670:       % caption text.
                   8671:       \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
                   8672:     \fi
                   8673:     %
                   8674:     % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
                   8675:     % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
                   8676:     \ifx\captionline\empty \else
                   8677:       \vskip.5\parskip
                   8678:       \captionline
                   8679:       %
                   8680:       % Space below caption.
                   8681:       \vskip\parskip
                   8682:     \fi
                   8683:     %
                   8684:     % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
                   8685:     % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
                   8686:     \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
                   8687:       % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
                   8688:       % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
                   8689:       % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
                   8690:       {%
                   8691:         \atdummies
                   8692:         %
                   8693:         % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
                   8694:         % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
                   8695:         % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
                   8696:        \scanexp{%
                   8697:          \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
                   8698:            \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
                   8699:              \thiscaption
                   8700:            \else
                   8701:              \thisshortcaption
                   8702:            \fi
                   8703:          }%
                   8704:        }%
                   8705:         \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
                   8706:          \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
                   8707:       }%
                   8708:     \fi
                   8709:   \egroup  % end of \vtop
                   8710:   %
                   8711:   % place the captured inserts
                   8712:   %
                   8713:   % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
                   8714:   % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
                   8715:   % float. --kasal, 26may04
                   8716:   %
                   8717:   \checkinserts
                   8718: }
                   8719: 
                   8720: % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
                   8721: %
                   8722: \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
                   8723:   \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
                   8724: }
                   8725: 
                   8726: % @caption, @shortcaption
                   8727: %
                   8728: \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
                   8729: \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
                   8730: \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
                   8731: \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
                   8732: 
                   8733: % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
                   8734: % going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
                   8735: \def\getfloatno#1{%
                   8736:   \ifx#1\relax
                   8737:       % Haven't seen this figure type before.
                   8738:       \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
                   8739:       %
                   8740:       % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
                   8741:       \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
                   8742:         \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
                   8743:   \fi
                   8744:   \let\floatno#1%
                   8745: }
                   8746: 
                   8747: % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
                   8748: % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
                   8749: % first read the @float command.
                   8750: %
                   8751: \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
                   8752: 
                   8753: % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
                   8754: % distinguish floats from other xref types.
                   8755: \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
                   8756: 
                   8757: % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
                   8758: % which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
                   8759: % \lastsection value which we \setref above.
                   8760: %
                   8761: \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
                   8762: %
                   8763: % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
                   8764: % (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
                   8765: %
                   8766: \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
                   8767:   \def\temp{#1}%
                   8768:   \def\iffloattype{#2}%
                   8769:   \ifx\temp\floatmagic
                   8770: }
                   8771: 
                   8772: % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
                   8773: %
                   8774: \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
                   8775:   \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
                   8776:   {%
                   8777:     % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
                   8778:     % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
                   8779:     \indexnofonts
                   8780:     \turnoffactive
                   8781:     \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
                   8782:   }%
                   8783:   %
                   8784:   % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
                   8785:   \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
                   8786:     \ifhavexrefs
                   8787:       % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
                   8788:       \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
                   8789:     \fi
                   8790:   \else
                   8791:     \begingroup
                   8792:       \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
                   8793:       \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
                   8794:       \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
                   8795:     \endgroup
                   8796:   \fi
                   8797: }
                   8798: 
                   8799: % This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
                   8800: % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
                   8801: % aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
                   8802: % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
                   8803: %
                   8804: % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
                   8805: % they won't appear in the aux file).
                   8806: %
                   8807: \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
                   8808: \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
                   8809:   % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
                   8810:   % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
                   8811:   % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
                   8812:   % in pdf output.
                   8813:   \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
                   8814:   %
                   8815:   % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
                   8816:   \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
                   8817:   \writeentry
                   8818: }}
                   8819: 
                   8820: 
                   8821: \message{localization,}
                   8822: 
                   8823: % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
                   8824: % early, just after @documentencoding.  Single argument is the language
                   8825: % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
                   8826: %
                   8827: {
                   8828:   \catcode`\_ = \active
                   8829:   \globaldefs=1
                   8830: \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
                   8831:   \let_=\normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filenames
                   8832:   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
                   8833:     % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
                   8834:     \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
                   8835:     \ifeof 1
                   8836:       \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
                   8837:     \else
                   8838:       \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
                   8839:       \input txi-#1.tex
                   8840:     \fi
                   8841:     \closein 1
                   8842:   \endgroup % end raw TeX
                   8843: \endgroup}
                   8844: %
                   8845: % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
                   8846: % try txi-de.tex.
                   8847: %
                   8848: \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
                   8849:   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
                   8850:   \ifeof 1
                   8851:     \errhelp = \nolanghelp
                   8852:     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
                   8853:   \else
                   8854:     \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
                   8855:     \input txi-#1.tex
                   8856:   \fi
                   8857:   \closein 1
                   8858: }
                   8859: }% end of special _ catcode
                   8860: %
                   8861: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
                   8862: is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  Putting it in the current
                   8863: directory should work if nowhere else does.}
                   8864: 
                   8865: % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
                   8866: % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
                   8867: % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
                   8868: %
                   8869: % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
                   8870: % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
                   8871: % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
                   8872: %
                   8873: % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
                   8874: % available languages.  This means we can support hyphenation in
                   8875: % Texinfo, at least to some extent.  (This still doesn't solve the
                   8876: % accented characters problem.)
                   8877: %
                   8878: \catcode`@=11
                   8879: \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
                   8880:   % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
                   8881:   \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
                   8882:     \message{no patterns for #1}%
                   8883:   \else
                   8884:     \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
                   8885:   \fi
                   8886:   % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
                   8887:   \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
                   8888:   \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
                   8889: }
                   8890: 
                   8891: % Helpers for encodings.
                   8892: % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
                   8893: %
                   8894: \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
                   8895:    \count255=128
                   8896:    \loop\ifnum\count255<256
                   8897:       \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
                   8898:       \advance\count255 by 1
                   8899:    \repeat
                   8900: }
                   8901: 
                   8902: \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
                   8903:    \count255=128
                   8904:    \loop\ifnum\count255<256
                   8905:       \catcode\count255=#1\relax
                   8906:       \advance\count255 by 1
                   8907:    \repeat
                   8908: }
                   8909: 
                   8910: % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
                   8911: % according to the specified encoding.
                   8912: %
                   8913: \parseargdef\documentencoding{%
                   8914:   % Encoding being declared for the document.
                   8915:   \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
                   8916:   %
                   8917:   % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
                   8918:   % to compare them with \ifx.
                   8919:   \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
                   8920:   \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
                   8921:   \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
                   8922:   \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
                   8923:   \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
                   8924:   %
                   8925:   \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
                   8926:      \asciichardefs
                   8927:   %
                   8928:   \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
                   8929:      \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
                   8930:      \lattwochardefs
                   8931:   %
                   8932:   \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
                   8933:      \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
                   8934:      \latonechardefs
                   8935:   %
                   8936:   \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
                   8937:      \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
                   8938:      \latninechardefs
                   8939:   %
                   8940:   \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
                   8941:      \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
                   8942:      \utfeightchardefs
                   8943:   %
                   8944:   \else
                   8945:     \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
                   8946:   %
                   8947:   \fi % utfeight
                   8948:   \fi % latnine
                   8949:   \fi % latone
                   8950:   \fi % lattwo
                   8951:   \fi % ascii
                   8952: }
                   8953: 
                   8954: % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
                   8955: % the default font encoding (OT1).
                   8956: %
                   8957: \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
                   8958: 
                   8959: % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
                   8960: \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
                   8961: 
                   8962: % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
                   8963: % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
                   8964: % macros containing the character definitions.
                   8965: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
                   8966: %
                   8967: % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
                   8968: \def\latonechardefs{%
                   8969:   \gdef^^a0{\tie}
                   8970:   \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
                   8971:   \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
                   8972:   \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
                   8973:   \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
                   8974:   \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
                   8975:   \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
                   8976:   \gdef^^a7{\S}
                   8977:   \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
                   8978:   \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
                   8979:   \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
                   8980:   \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
                   8981:   \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
                   8982:   \gdef^^ad{\-}
                   8983:   \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
                   8984:   \gdef^^af{\={}}
                   8985:   %
                   8986:   \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
                   8987:   \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
                   8988:   \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
                   8989:   \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
                   8990:   \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
                   8991:   \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
                   8992:   \gdef^^b6{\P}
                   8993:   %
                   8994:   \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
                   8995:   \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
                   8996:   \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
                   8997:   \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
                   8998:   %
                   8999:   \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
                   9000:   \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
                   9001:   \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
                   9002:   \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
                   9003:   \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
                   9004:   %
                   9005:   \gdef^^c0{\`A}
                   9006:   \gdef^^c1{\'A}
                   9007:   \gdef^^c2{\^A}
                   9008:   \gdef^^c3{\~A}
                   9009:   \gdef^^c4{\"A}
                   9010:   \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
                   9011:   \gdef^^c6{\AE}
                   9012:   \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
                   9013:   \gdef^^c8{\`E}
                   9014:   \gdef^^c9{\'E}
                   9015:   \gdef^^ca{\^E}
                   9016:   \gdef^^cb{\"E}
                   9017:   \gdef^^cc{\`I}
                   9018:   \gdef^^cd{\'I}
                   9019:   \gdef^^ce{\^I}
                   9020:   \gdef^^cf{\"I}
                   9021:   %
                   9022:   \gdef^^d0{\DH}
                   9023:   \gdef^^d1{\~N}
                   9024:   \gdef^^d2{\`O}
                   9025:   \gdef^^d3{\'O}
                   9026:   \gdef^^d4{\^O}
                   9027:   \gdef^^d5{\~O}
                   9028:   \gdef^^d6{\"O}
                   9029:   \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
                   9030:   \gdef^^d8{\O}
                   9031:   \gdef^^d9{\`U}
                   9032:   \gdef^^da{\'U}
                   9033:   \gdef^^db{\^U}
                   9034:   \gdef^^dc{\"U}
                   9035:   \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
                   9036:   \gdef^^de{\TH}
                   9037:   \gdef^^df{\ss}
                   9038:   %
                   9039:   \gdef^^e0{\`a}
                   9040:   \gdef^^e1{\'a}
                   9041:   \gdef^^e2{\^a}
                   9042:   \gdef^^e3{\~a}
                   9043:   \gdef^^e4{\"a}
                   9044:   \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
                   9045:   \gdef^^e6{\ae}
                   9046:   \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
                   9047:   \gdef^^e8{\`e}
                   9048:   \gdef^^e9{\'e}
                   9049:   \gdef^^ea{\^e}
                   9050:   \gdef^^eb{\"e}
                   9051:   \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
                   9052:   \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
                   9053:   \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
                   9054:   \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
                   9055:   %
                   9056:   \gdef^^f0{\dh}
                   9057:   \gdef^^f1{\~n}
                   9058:   \gdef^^f2{\`o}
                   9059:   \gdef^^f3{\'o}
                   9060:   \gdef^^f4{\^o}
                   9061:   \gdef^^f5{\~o}
                   9062:   \gdef^^f6{\"o}
                   9063:   \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
                   9064:   \gdef^^f8{\o}
                   9065:   \gdef^^f9{\`u}
                   9066:   \gdef^^fa{\'u}
                   9067:   \gdef^^fb{\^u}
                   9068:   \gdef^^fc{\"u}
                   9069:   \gdef^^fd{\'y}
                   9070:   \gdef^^fe{\th}
                   9071:   \gdef^^ff{\"y}
                   9072: }
                   9073: 
                   9074: % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
                   9075: \def\latninechardefs{%
                   9076:   % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
                   9077:   \latonechardefs
                   9078:   %
                   9079:   \gdef^^a4{\euro}
                   9080:   \gdef^^a6{\v S}
                   9081:   \gdef^^a8{\v s}
                   9082:   \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
                   9083:   \gdef^^b8{\v z}
                   9084:   \gdef^^bc{\OE}
                   9085:   \gdef^^bd{\oe}
                   9086:   \gdef^^be{\"Y}
                   9087: }
                   9088: 
                   9089: % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
                   9090: \def\lattwochardefs{%
                   9091:   \gdef^^a0{\tie}
                   9092:   \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
                   9093:   \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
                   9094:   \gdef^^a3{\L}
                   9095:   \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
                   9096:   \gdef^^a5{\v L}
                   9097:   \gdef^^a6{\'S}
                   9098:   \gdef^^a7{\S}
                   9099:   \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
                   9100:   \gdef^^a9{\v S}
                   9101:   \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
                   9102:   \gdef^^ab{\v T}
                   9103:   \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
                   9104:   \gdef^^ad{\-}
                   9105:   \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
                   9106:   \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
                   9107:   %
                   9108:   \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
                   9109:   \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
                   9110:   \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
                   9111:   \gdef^^b3{\l}
                   9112:   \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
                   9113:   \gdef^^b5{\v l}
                   9114:   \gdef^^b6{\'s}
                   9115:   \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
                   9116:   \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
                   9117:   \gdef^^b9{\v s}
                   9118:   \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
                   9119:   \gdef^^bb{\v t}
                   9120:   \gdef^^bc{\'z}
                   9121:   \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
                   9122:   \gdef^^be{\v z}
                   9123:   \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
                   9124:   %
                   9125:   \gdef^^c0{\'R}
                   9126:   \gdef^^c1{\'A}
                   9127:   \gdef^^c2{\^A}
                   9128:   \gdef^^c3{\u A}
                   9129:   \gdef^^c4{\"A}
                   9130:   \gdef^^c5{\'L}
                   9131:   \gdef^^c6{\'C}
                   9132:   \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
                   9133:   \gdef^^c8{\v C}
                   9134:   \gdef^^c9{\'E}
                   9135:   \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
                   9136:   \gdef^^cb{\"E}
                   9137:   \gdef^^cc{\v E}
                   9138:   \gdef^^cd{\'I}
                   9139:   \gdef^^ce{\^I}
                   9140:   \gdef^^cf{\v D}
                   9141:   %
                   9142:   \gdef^^d0{\DH}
                   9143:   \gdef^^d1{\'N}
                   9144:   \gdef^^d2{\v N}
                   9145:   \gdef^^d3{\'O}
                   9146:   \gdef^^d4{\^O}
                   9147:   \gdef^^d5{\H O}
                   9148:   \gdef^^d6{\"O}
                   9149:   \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
                   9150:   \gdef^^d8{\v R}
                   9151:   \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
                   9152:   \gdef^^da{\'U}
                   9153:   \gdef^^db{\H U}
                   9154:   \gdef^^dc{\"U}
                   9155:   \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
                   9156:   \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
                   9157:   \gdef^^df{\ss}
                   9158:   %
                   9159:   \gdef^^e0{\'r}
                   9160:   \gdef^^e1{\'a}
                   9161:   \gdef^^e2{\^a}
                   9162:   \gdef^^e3{\u a}
                   9163:   \gdef^^e4{\"a}
                   9164:   \gdef^^e5{\'l}
                   9165:   \gdef^^e6{\'c}
                   9166:   \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
                   9167:   \gdef^^e8{\v c}
                   9168:   \gdef^^e9{\'e}
                   9169:   \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
                   9170:   \gdef^^eb{\"e}
                   9171:   \gdef^^ec{\v e}
                   9172:   \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
                   9173:   \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
                   9174:   \gdef^^ef{\v d}
                   9175:   %
                   9176:   \gdef^^f0{\dh}
                   9177:   \gdef^^f1{\'n}
                   9178:   \gdef^^f2{\v n}
                   9179:   \gdef^^f3{\'o}
                   9180:   \gdef^^f4{\^o}
                   9181:   \gdef^^f5{\H o}
                   9182:   \gdef^^f6{\"o}
                   9183:   \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
                   9184:   \gdef^^f8{\v r}
                   9185:   \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
                   9186:   \gdef^^fa{\'u}
                   9187:   \gdef^^fb{\H u}
                   9188:   \gdef^^fc{\"u}
                   9189:   \gdef^^fd{\'y}
                   9190:   \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
                   9191:   \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
                   9192: }
                   9193: 
                   9194: % UTF-8 character definitions.
                   9195: %
                   9196: % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
                   9197: % changes for Texinfo conventions.  It is included here under the GPL by
                   9198: % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
                   9199: %
                   9200: \newcount\countUTFx
                   9201: \newcount\countUTFy
                   9202: \newcount\countUTFz
                   9203: 
                   9204: \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
                   9205:    \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
                   9206: %
                   9207: \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
                   9208:    \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
                   9209: %
                   9210: \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
                   9211:    \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
                   9212: 
                   9213: \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
                   9214:   \ifx #1\relax
                   9215:     \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
                   9216:   \else
                   9217:     \expandafter #1%
                   9218:   \fi
                   9219: }
                   9220: 
                   9221: \begingroup
                   9222:   \catcode`\~13
                   9223:   \catcode`\"12
                   9224: 
                   9225:   \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
                   9226:     \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
                   9227:     \uccode`\~\countUTFx
                   9228:     \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
                   9229:     \advance\countUTFx by 1
                   9230:     \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
                   9231:       \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
                   9232:     \fi}
                   9233: 
                   9234:   \countUTFx = "C2
                   9235:   \countUTFy = "E0
                   9236:   \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
                   9237:     \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
                   9238:   \UTFviiiLoop
                   9239: 
                   9240:   \countUTFx = "E0
                   9241:   \countUTFy = "F0
                   9242:   \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
                   9243:     \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
                   9244:   \UTFviiiLoop
                   9245: 
                   9246:   \countUTFx = "F0
                   9247:   \countUTFy = "F4
                   9248:   \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
                   9249:     \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
                   9250:   \UTFviiiLoop
                   9251: \endgroup
                   9252: 
                   9253: \begingroup
                   9254:   \catcode`\"=12
                   9255:   \catcode`\<=12
                   9256:   \catcode`\.=12
                   9257:   \catcode`\,=12
                   9258:   \catcode`\;=12
                   9259:   \catcode`\!=12
                   9260:   \catcode`\~=13
                   9261: 
                   9262:   \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
                   9263:     \countUTFz = "#1\relax
                   9264:     %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
                   9265:     \begingroup
                   9266:       \parseXMLCharref
                   9267:       \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
                   9268:         \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
                   9269:       \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
                   9270:         \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
                   9271:       \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
                   9272:         \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
                   9273:       \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
                   9274:        \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
                   9275:        \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
                   9276:     \endgroup}
                   9277: 
                   9278:   \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
                   9279:     \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
                   9280:       \errhelp = \EMsimple
                   9281:       \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
                   9282:     \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
                   9283:       \parseUTFviiiA,%
                   9284:       \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
                   9285:     \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
                   9286:       \parseUTFviiiA;%
                   9287:       \parseUTFviiiA,%
                   9288:       \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
                   9289:     \else
                   9290:       \parseUTFviiiA;%
                   9291:       \parseUTFviiiA,%
                   9292:       \parseUTFviiiA!%
                   9293:       \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
                   9294:     \fi\fi\fi
                   9295:   }
                   9296: 
                   9297:   \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
                   9298:     \countUTFx = \countUTFz
                   9299:     \divide\countUTFz by 64
                   9300:     \countUTFy = \countUTFz
                   9301:     \multiply\countUTFz by 64
                   9302:     \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
                   9303:     \advance\countUTFx by 128
                   9304:     \uccode `#1\countUTFx
                   9305:     \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
                   9306: 
                   9307:   \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
                   9308:     \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
                   9309:     \uccode `#3\countUTFz
                   9310:     \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
                   9311: \endgroup
                   9312: 
                   9313: \def\utfeightchardefs{%
                   9314:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
                   9315:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
                   9316:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
                   9317:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
                   9318:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
                   9319:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
                   9320:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
                   9321:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
                   9322:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
                   9323:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
                   9324: 
                   9325:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
                   9326:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
                   9327:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
                   9328:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
                   9329:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
                   9330:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
                   9331: 
                   9332:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
                   9333:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
                   9334:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
                   9335:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
                   9336:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
                   9337:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
                   9338:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
                   9339:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
                   9340:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
                   9341:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
                   9342:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
                   9343:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
                   9344:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
                   9345:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
                   9346:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
                   9347:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
                   9348: 
                   9349:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
                   9350:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
                   9351:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
                   9352:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
                   9353:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
                   9354:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
                   9355:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
                   9356:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
                   9357:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
                   9358:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
                   9359:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
                   9360:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
                   9361:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
                   9362:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
                   9363:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
                   9364: 
                   9365:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
                   9366:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
                   9367:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
                   9368:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
                   9369:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
                   9370:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
                   9371:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
                   9372:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
                   9373:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
                   9374:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
                   9375:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
                   9376:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
                   9377:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
                   9378:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
                   9379:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
                   9380:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
                   9381: 
                   9382:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
                   9383:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
                   9384:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
                   9385:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
                   9386:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
                   9387:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
                   9388:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
                   9389:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
                   9390:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
                   9391:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
                   9392:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
                   9393:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
                   9394:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
                   9395:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
                   9396:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
                   9397: 
                   9398:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
                   9399:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
                   9400:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
                   9401:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
                   9402:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
                   9403:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
                   9404:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
                   9405:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
                   9406:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
                   9407:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
                   9408:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
                   9409:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
                   9410:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
                   9411:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
                   9412:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
                   9413:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
                   9414:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
                   9415: 
                   9416:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
                   9417:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
                   9418:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
                   9419:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
                   9420:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
                   9421:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
                   9422:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
                   9423:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
                   9424:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
                   9425:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
                   9426:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
                   9427:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
                   9428: 
                   9429:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
                   9430:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
                   9431:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
                   9432:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
                   9433:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
                   9434:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
                   9435:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
                   9436:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
                   9437:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
                   9438:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
                   9439: 
                   9440:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
                   9441:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
                   9442:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
                   9443:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
                   9444:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
                   9445:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
                   9446:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
                   9447:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
                   9448: 
                   9449:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
                   9450:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
                   9451:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
                   9452:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
                   9453:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
                   9454:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
                   9455:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
                   9456:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
                   9457:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
                   9458:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
                   9459: 
                   9460:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
                   9461:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
                   9462:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
                   9463:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
                   9464:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
                   9465:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
                   9466:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
                   9467:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
                   9468:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
                   9469:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
                   9470:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
                   9471:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
                   9472:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
                   9473:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
                   9474: 
                   9475:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
                   9476:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
                   9477:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
                   9478:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
                   9479:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
                   9480: 
                   9481:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
                   9482:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
                   9483:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
                   9484:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
                   9485:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
                   9486:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
                   9487:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
                   9488:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
                   9489: 
                   9490:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
                   9491:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
                   9492:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
                   9493:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
                   9494:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
                   9495:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
                   9496:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
                   9497:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
                   9498:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
                   9499:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
                   9500:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
                   9501:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
                   9502:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
                   9503: 
                   9504:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
                   9505:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
                   9506:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
                   9507:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
                   9508:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
                   9509:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
                   9510:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
                   9511:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
                   9512:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
                   9513:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
                   9514:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
                   9515:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
                   9516: 
                   9517:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
                   9518:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
                   9519:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
                   9520:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
                   9521:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
                   9522: 
                   9523:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
                   9524:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
                   9525:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
                   9526:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
                   9527:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
                   9528:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
                   9529: 
                   9530:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
                   9531:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
                   9532:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
                   9533:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
                   9534:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
                   9535:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
                   9536:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
                   9537:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
                   9538:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
                   9539:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
                   9540:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
                   9541:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
                   9542: 
                   9543:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
                   9544:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
                   9545: 
                   9546:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
                   9547:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
                   9548:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
                   9549:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
                   9550:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
                   9551:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
                   9552: 
                   9553:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
                   9554:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
                   9555:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
                   9556: 
                   9557:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
                   9558: 
                   9559:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
                   9560:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
                   9561:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
                   9562:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
                   9563:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
                   9564:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
                   9565:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
                   9566:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
                   9567:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
                   9568:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
                   9569:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
                   9570:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
                   9571: 
                   9572:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
                   9573:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
                   9574: 
                   9575:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
                   9576:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
                   9577:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
                   9578:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
                   9579:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
                   9580:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
                   9581:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
                   9582:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
                   9583: 
                   9584:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
                   9585:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
                   9586:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
                   9587:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
                   9588:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
                   9589:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
                   9590:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
                   9591:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
                   9592:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
                   9593:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
                   9594:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
                   9595:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
                   9596: 
                   9597:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
                   9598:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
                   9599:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
                   9600:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
                   9601:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
                   9602:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
                   9603:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
                   9604:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
                   9605:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
                   9606:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
                   9607: 
                   9608:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
                   9609:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
                   9610:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
                   9611:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
                   9612:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
                   9613:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
                   9614:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
                   9615:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
                   9616:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
                   9617:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
                   9618: 
                   9619:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
                   9620:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
                   9621:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
                   9622:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
                   9623:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
                   9624:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
                   9625:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
                   9626:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
                   9627:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
                   9628:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
                   9629: 
                   9630:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
                   9631:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
                   9632:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
                   9633:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
                   9634: 
                   9635:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
                   9636:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
                   9637:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
                   9638:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
                   9639:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
                   9640:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
                   9641:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
                   9642:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
                   9643:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
                   9644:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
                   9645:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
                   9646:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
                   9647:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
                   9648:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
                   9649:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
                   9650:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
                   9651: 
                   9652:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
                   9653:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
                   9654:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
                   9655:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
                   9656:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
                   9657:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
                   9658:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
                   9659:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
                   9660:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
                   9661:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
                   9662: 
                   9663:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
                   9664:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
                   9665: 
                   9666:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
                   9667:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
                   9668:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
                   9669:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
                   9670: 
                   9671:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
                   9672:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
                   9673:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
                   9674:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
                   9675: 
                   9676:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
                   9677:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
                   9678: 
                   9679:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
                   9680:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
                   9681:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
                   9682: 
                   9683:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
                   9684:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
                   9685: 
                   9686:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
                   9687:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
                   9688:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
                   9689:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
                   9690:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
                   9691:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
                   9692:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
                   9693:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
                   9694:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
                   9695:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
                   9696:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
                   9697:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
                   9698:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
                   9699: 
                   9700:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
                   9701:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
                   9702: 
                   9703:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
                   9704:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
                   9705:   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
                   9706: }% end of \utfeightchardefs
                   9707: 
                   9708: 
                   9709: % US-ASCII character definitions.
                   9710: \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
                   9711:    \relax
                   9712: }
                   9713: 
                   9714: % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
                   9715: % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
                   9716: % document encoding.
                   9717: %
                   9718: \setnonasciicharscatcode \other
                   9719: 
                   9720: 
                   9721: \message{formatting,}
                   9722: 
                   9723: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
                   9724: 
                   9725: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
                   9726: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
                   9727: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
                   9728: 
                   9729: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
                   9730: \vbadness = 10000
                   9731: 
                   9732: % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
                   9733: \hbadness = 6666
                   9734: 
                   9735: % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
                   9736: \widowpenalty=10000
                   9737: \clubpenalty=10000
                   9738: 
                   9739: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
                   9740: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
                   9741: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
                   9742: % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
                   9743: %
                   9744: \def\setemergencystretch{%
                   9745:   \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
                   9746:     % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
                   9747:     \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
                   9748:   \else
                   9749:     \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
                   9750:   \fi
                   9751: }
                   9752: 
                   9753: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
                   9754: % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
                   9755: % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
                   9756: %
                   9757: % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
                   9758: % \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
                   9759: %
                   9760: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
                   9761:   \voffset = #3\relax
                   9762:   \topskip = #6\relax
                   9763:   \splittopskip = \topskip
                   9764:   %
                   9765:   \vsize = #1\relax
                   9766:   \advance\vsize by \topskip
                   9767:   \outervsize = \vsize
                   9768:   \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
                   9769:   \pageheight = \vsize
                   9770:   %
                   9771:   \hsize = #2\relax
                   9772:   \outerhsize = \hsize
                   9773:   \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
                   9774:   \pagewidth = \hsize
                   9775:   %
                   9776:   \normaloffset = #4\relax
                   9777:   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
                   9778:   %
                   9779:   \ifpdf
                   9780:     \pdfpageheight #7\relax
                   9781:     \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
                   9782:     % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
                   9783:     % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
                   9784:     \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
                   9785:     \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
                   9786:   \fi
                   9787:   %
                   9788:   \setleading{\textleading}
                   9789:   %
                   9790:   \parindent = \defaultparindent
                   9791:   \setemergencystretch
                   9792: }
                   9793: 
                   9794: % @letterpaper (the default).
                   9795: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
                   9796:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
                   9797:   \textleading = 13.2pt
                   9798:   %
                   9799:   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
                   9800:   \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
                   9801:                     {\voffset}{.25in}%
                   9802:                     {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
                   9803:                     {11in}{8.5in}%
                   9804: }}
                   9805: 
                   9806: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
                   9807: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
                   9808:   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
                   9809:   \textleading = 12pt
                   9810:   %
                   9811:   \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
                   9812:                     {-.2in}{0in}%
                   9813:                     {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
                   9814:                     {9.25in}{7in}%
                   9815:   %
                   9816:   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
                   9817:   \tolerance = 700
                   9818:   \hfuzz = 1pt
                   9819:   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
                   9820:   \defbodyindent = .5cm
                   9821: }}
                   9822: 
                   9823: % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
                   9824: % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
                   9825: \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
                   9826:   \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
                   9827:   \textleading = 12pt
                   9828:   %
                   9829:   \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
                   9830:                     {-.2in}{-.4in}%
                   9831:                     {0pt}{14pt}%
                   9832:                     {9in}{6in}%
                   9833:   %
                   9834:   \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
                   9835:   \tolerance = 700
                   9836:   \hfuzz = 1pt
                   9837:   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
                   9838:   \defbodyindent = .4cm
                   9839: }}
                   9840: 
                   9841: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
                   9842: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
                   9843:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
                   9844:   \textleading = 13.2pt
                   9845:   %
                   9846:   % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
                   9847:   % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
                   9848:   % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
                   9849:   % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
                   9850:   % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
                   9851:   % your texinfo source file like this:
                   9852:   % @tex
                   9853:   % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
                   9854:   % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
                   9855:   % @end tex
                   9856:   \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
                   9857:                     {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
                   9858:                     {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
                   9859:                     {297mm}{210mm}%
                   9860:   %
                   9861:   \tolerance = 700
                   9862:   \hfuzz = 1pt
                   9863:   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
                   9864:   \defbodyindent = 5mm
                   9865: }}
                   9866: 
                   9867: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
                   9868: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
                   9869: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
                   9870: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
                   9871:   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
                   9872:   \textleading = 12.5pt
                   9873:   %
                   9874:   \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
                   9875:                     {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
                   9876:                     {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
                   9877:                     {210mm}{148mm}%
                   9878:   %
                   9879:   \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
                   9880:   \tolerance = 800
                   9881:   \hfuzz = 1.2pt
                   9882:   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
                   9883:   \defbodyindent = 2mm
                   9884:   \tableindent = 12mm
                   9885: }}
                   9886: 
                   9887: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
                   9888: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
                   9889:   \afourpaper
                   9890:   \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
                   9891:                     {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
                   9892:                     {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
                   9893:                     {297mm}{210mm}%
                   9894:   %
                   9895:   % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
                   9896:   \globaldefs = 0
                   9897: }}
                   9898: 
                   9899: % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
                   9900: \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
                   9901:   \afourpaper
                   9902:   \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
                   9903:                     {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
                   9904:                     {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
                   9905:                     {297mm}{210mm}%
                   9906:   \globaldefs = 0
                   9907: }}
                   9908: 
                   9909: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
                   9910: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
                   9911: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
                   9912: %
                   9913: \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
                   9914: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
                   9915:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
                   9916:   \globaldefs = 1
                   9917:   %
                   9918:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
                   9919:   \setleading{\textleading}%
                   9920:   %
                   9921:   \dimen0 = #1\relax
                   9922:   \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
                   9923:   %
                   9924:   \dimen2 = \hsize
                   9925:   \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
                   9926:   %
                   9927:   \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
                   9928:                     {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
                   9929:                     {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
                   9930:                     {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
                   9931: }}
                   9932: 
                   9933: % Set default to letter.
                   9934: %
                   9935: \letterpaper
                   9936: 
                   9937: 
                   9938: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
                   9939: 
                   9940: \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
                   9941: 
                   9942: % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
                   9943: \catcode`\^^? = 14
                   9944: 
                   9945: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
                   9946: \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
                   9947: \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
                   9948: \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
                   9949: \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
                   9950: \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
                   9951: \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
                   9952: \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
                   9953: \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
                   9954: \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
                   9955: 
                   9956: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
                   9957: % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
                   9958: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
                   9959: %
                   9960: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
                   9961: % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
                   9962: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
                   9963: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
                   9964: %
                   9965: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
                   9966: 
                   9967: % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
                   9968: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
                   9969: % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
                   9970: % this is not a problem.
                   9971: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
                   9972: 
                   9973: % Turn off all special characters except @
                   9974: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
                   9975: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
                   9976: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
                   9977: 
                   9978: \catcode`\"=\active
                   9979: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
                   9980: \let"=\activedoublequote
                   9981: \catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
                   9982: \chardef\hat=`\^
                   9983: \catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hat}} \let^ = \activehat
                   9984: 
                   9985: \catcode`\_=\active
                   9986: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
                   9987: \let\realunder=_
                   9988: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
                   9989: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
                   9990: 
                   9991: \catcode`\|=\active
                   9992: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
                   9993: 
                   9994: \chardef \less=`\<
                   9995: \catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
                   9996: \chardef \gtr=`\>
                   9997: \catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
                   9998: \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
                   9999: \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
                   10000: 
                   10001: % used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
                   10002: % breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
                   10003: \def\texinfochars{%
                   10004:   \let< = \activeless
                   10005:   \let> = \activegtr
                   10006:   \let~ = \activetilde 
                   10007:   \let^ = \activehat
                   10008:   \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 
                   10009:   \let\b = \strong
                   10010:   \let\i = \smartitalic
                   10011:   % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
                   10012: }
                   10013: 
                   10014: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
                   10015: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
                   10016: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
                   10017: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
                   10018: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
                   10019: 
                   10020: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
                   10021: % parsing them.
                   10022: \def\turnoffactive{%
                   10023:   \normalturnoffactive
                   10024:   \otherbackslash
                   10025: }
                   10026: 
                   10027: \catcode`\@=0
                   10028: 
                   10029: % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
                   10030: % as in \char`\\.
                   10031: \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
                   10032: \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
                   10033: 
                   10034: % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
                   10035: % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
                   10036: {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
                   10037: 
                   10038: % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
                   10039: % in fixed width font.
                   10040: \catcode`\\=\active  % @ for escape char from now on.
                   10041: 
                   10042: % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
                   10043: % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
                   10044: % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
                   10045: % \mathcode`\\="026E).  It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
                   10046: % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
                   10047: % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
                   10048: % ignored family value; char position "5C).  We can't use " for the
                   10049: % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
                   10050: @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
                   10051: @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
                   10052: 
                   10053: % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
                   10054: %  @let \ = @normalbackslash
                   10055: % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
                   10056: % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
                   10057: % catcode other.  We switch back and forth between these.
                   10058: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
                   10059: @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
                   10060: 
                   10061: % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
                   10062: % the literal character `\'.  Also revert - to its normal character, in
                   10063: % case the active - from code has slipped in.
                   10064: %
                   10065: {@catcode`- = @active
                   10066:  @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
                   10067:    @let-=@normaldash
                   10068:    @let"=@normaldoublequote
                   10069:    @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
                   10070:    @let+=@normalplus
                   10071:    @let<=@normalless
                   10072:    @let>=@normalgreater
                   10073:    @let\=@normalbackslash
                   10074:    @let^=@normalcaret
                   10075:    @let_=@normalunderscore
                   10076:    @let|=@normalverticalbar
                   10077:    @let~=@normaltilde
                   10078:    @markupsetuplqdefault
                   10079:    @markupsetuprqdefault
                   10080:    @unsepspaces
                   10081:  }
                   10082: }
                   10083: 
                   10084: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
                   10085: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
                   10086: @otherifyactive
                   10087: 
                   10088: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
                   10089: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
                   10090: % a backslash.
                   10091: %
                   10092: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
                   10093: @global@let\ = @eatinput
                   10094: 
                   10095: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
                   10096: % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
                   10097: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
                   10098: % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
                   10099: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
                   10100: %
                   10101: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
                   10102:   @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
                   10103:   @catcode`+=@active
                   10104:   @catcode`@_=@active
                   10105: }
                   10106: 
                   10107: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
                   10108: @escapechar = `@@
                   10109: 
                   10110: % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
                   10111: % active definitions as the normal characters.
                   10112: @def@normaldot{.}
                   10113: @def@normalquest{?}
                   10114: @def@normalslash{/}
                   10115: 
                   10116: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
                   10117: % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
                   10118: @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
                   10119: @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
                   10120: @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
                   10121: 
                   10122: @let @hashchar = @normalhash
                   10123: 
                   10124: @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
                   10125: @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}.  If we
                   10126: @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
                   10127: @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
                   10128: @catcode`@'=@active
                   10129: @catcode`@`=@active
                   10130: @markupsetuplqdefault
                   10131: @markupsetuprqdefault
                   10132: 
                   10133: @c Local variables:
                   10134: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
                   10135: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
                   10136: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
                   10137: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
                   10138: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
                   10139: @c End:
                   10140: 
                   10141: @c vim:sw=2:
                   10142: 
                   10143: @ignore
                   10144:    arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
                   10145: @end ignore

FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>